Page 1 Service Manual Index NOTE: Refer to the following list to look up A/C Compressor Relief Valve ABS Modulator Unit DTCs, symptoms, fuses, connectors, wire Replacement ......... 21-53 Removal/Installation ......19-76 harnesses, specifications, maintenance schedules, and general service A/C Condenser ABS-TCS Components information: Replacement...
Page 2 Service Manual Index (cont’d) Blower Motor Low Speed Circuit, Rear A/C Bumper, Rear Inspection ........14-136, 367 Troubleshooting ....... . 21-127 Removal/Installation ......20-130 Replacement ......14-137, 368 Blower Motor Middle Speed Circuit, ATF Cooler Rear A/C Repair .........
Page 3 Connecting Rod Bearings Cruise Control Actuator Cable Differential Oil Seals, A/T Replacement ..........7-9 Adjustment ..........4-52 Replacement ......14-239, 479 Connecting Rods Cruise Control Communication Circuit DLC Circuit Inspection ..........7-6 Troubleshooting ........4-46 Troubleshooting .......
Page 4 Service Manual Index (cont’d) D4 Indicator Circuit Fenderwell Trim Fuel Pump Troubleshooting ......14-166, 169 Replacement ........20-149 Test ............11-218 Replacement ........11-230 Final Driven Gear, A/T Replacement ......14-238, 478 Fuel Supply System Component Location Index .....
Page 5 Heater Unit Ignition Switch Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Replacement ......... 21-46 Test ............22-91 Description ......... 22-256 Replacement ......... 22-92 Heater Valve Cable Keyless Receiver Unit Adjustment .......... . 21-48 Ignition System Input Test ..........22-276 Component Location Index ....
Page 6 Service Manual Index (cont’d) Map Light/Spotlight Oil Pan PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit Test ..........22-149, 150 Removal ..........7-11 Troubleshooting ......11-209, 212 Installation ..........7-28 MIL Circuit Piston Rings Troubleshooting ......11-166, 169 Oil Pressure Switch Replacement ..........
Page 7 PSP (Power Steering Pressure) Switch Rear Window Defogger Wires Seat Cover, Second Signal Circuit Repair ..........22-168 Replacement ......20-112, 116 Troubleshooting ......11-196, 197 Test ............22-168 Seat Cover, Third Rear Window Glass Replacement ........
Page 8 Service Manual Index (cont’d) Servo Body Sliding Doors Steering Wheel Disassembly/Inspection/ Component Location Index ....20-4 Inspection ..........17-7 Reassembly ......14-202, 434 Removal/Installation ......20-25 Removal ..........17-22 Adjustment .......... . 20-28 Disassembly/Reassembly ....
Page 9 Throttle Body Upper Arms Wiper Motor, Windshield Repair ..........11-237 Removal/Installation ......18-26 Test ............22-229 Test ............11-237 Replacement ........22-231 Removal/Installation ......11-243 Disassembly/Reassembly ....11-245 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index ....
Page 10 Service Manual Index (cont’d) 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement ........14-365 4th/5th Clutch Assembly Inspection .......... . 14-442...
Page 11: A Few Words About Safety
If there is any doubt, put on eye protection. If you need to replace a part, use Honda parts with the – Use other protective wear when necessary, for correct part number or an equivalent part. We strongly example, gloves or safety shoes.
Page 12: Specifications
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning First Edition 08/2003 2,464 pages HONDA MOTOR CO.,LTD. All Rights Reserved Service Publication Office Specifications apply to U.S.A. and Canada Body Electrical As sections with * include SRS components;...
Page 13 SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and should be done only by an authorized Honda dealer. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
Page 14: General Information
03/07/29 09:02:58 61S0X050_010_0001 General Information Chassis and Paint Codes - 1999 Model ....1-2 Chassis and Paint Codes - 2000 Model ..... 1-3 Chassis and Paint Codes - 2001 Model ..... 1-4 Chassis and Paint Codes - 2002 Model ..
Page 15 4 * X H 500001 a. Engine Type a. Manufacturer, Make, and Type of Vehicle J35A1: 3.5 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport 2HJ: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., Fuel-injected engine HONDA CANADA INC. b. Serial Number HONDA Light duty truck 2HK: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., Transmission Number HONDA CANADA INC.
Page 16 6 * Y H 500001 a. Engine Type a. Manufacturer, Make, and Type of Vehicle J35A1: 3.5 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport 2HJ: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., Fuel-injected engine HONDA CANADA INC. b. Serial Number HONDA Light duty truck 2HK: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., Transmission Number HONDA CANADA INC.
Page 17 2HJ: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., Fuel-injected engine HONDA CANADA INC. b. Serial Number HONDA Light duty truck 2HK: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., Transmission Number HONDA CANADA INC. HONDA Multipurpose passenger vehicle b. Line, Body, and Engine Type RL1: ODYSSEY/J35A1 B7TA 8000001 c.
Page 18 J35A4: 3.5 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport Fuel-injected engine a. Manufacturer, Make, and Type of Vehicle b. Serial Number 2HJ: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., 1500001 : Produced in Canada HONDA CANADA INC. 1000001 : Produced in Alabama HONDA Light duty truck 2HK: HONDA OF CANADA MFG.,...
Page 19: Engine Number
J35A4: 3.5 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport Fuel-injected engine a. Manufacturer, Make, and Type of Vehicle b. Serial Number 2HJ: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., 2800001 : Produced in Canada HONDA CANADA INC. 2000001 : Produced in Alabama HONDA Light duty truck 2HK: HONDA OF CANADA MFG.,...
Page 20 J35A4: 3.5 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport Fuel-injected engine a. Manufacturer, Make, and Type of Vehicle b. Serial Number 2HK: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., 3800001 : Produced in Canada HONDA CANADA INC. 3000001 : Produced in Alabama HONDA Multipurpose passenger vehicle 5FN: HONDA MGF.,...
Page 21: Identification Number Locations
General Information Identification Number Locations Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Number (VIN) Engine Number Transmission Number (5-speed for 2002-2004 models) Transmission Number (4-speed for 1999-2001 models)
Page 22 Warning/Caution Label Locations Cabin: Steering Wheel: SRS WARNING INFORMATION CABLE REEL CAUTION U.S. model DRIVER MODULE DANGER SRS WARNING INFORMATION FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG WARNING (CHILD SEAT) 1992-2001 models FRONT PASSENGER MODULE DANGER STEERING COLUMN NOTICE FRONT SEATBELT MONITOR NOTICE TENSIONER CAUTION FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG WARNING TAG (CHILD SEAT)
Page 23 General Information Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont’d) SERVICE ENGINE INFORMATION WARNING COOLANT (Under-hood LABEL INFORMATION Emission Control Label) 1999-2001 models WARNING LABEL 2002-2004 models TIRE INFORMATION SIDE AIRBAG INFORMATION Located on driver’s and passenger’s doorjamb. CONDITIONING INFORMATION BATTERY CAUTION RADIATOR CAUTION 1-10...
Page 24 Emission Group Identification Engine Family: Example: 03.5 a. Model Year X: 1999 b. Manufacturer Subcode HNX: HONDA c. Family Type T: LDT d. Displacement e. Sequence Characters 50 States LEV CFV NLEV Evaporative Family: THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV AND...
Page 25 Emission Group Identification Engine Family: Example: 03.5 a. Model Year Y: 2000 b. Manufacturer Subcode HNX: HONDA c. Family Type T: LDT d. Displacement e. Sequence Characters 50 States LEV CFV NLEV Evaporative Family: THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV AND...
Page 26 Emission Group Identification Engine Family: Example: 03.5 a. Model Year 1: 2001 b. Manufacturer Subcode HNX: HONDA c. Family Type T: LDT d. Displacement e. Sequence Characters 50 States LEV CFV NLEV Evaporative Family: THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV...
Page 27 P U R G E V A L V E T W C . H O 2 S ( 2 ) FRONT E G R . S F I HNX: HONDA c. Family Type 3 5 2 B G F F G T: LDT P 8 F - A 0 4 H o n d a M o t o r C o .
Page 28: Lift And Support Points
Lift and Support Points Floor Jack NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking safety stands.
Page 29 General Information Towing If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Wheel Lift Equipment The tow truck uses two towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and vehicle with just a rope or chain.
Page 30 Parts Marking To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. The original engine or transmission VIN plate is transferred to a replacement engine or transmission and attached with break-off bolts. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair.
Page 31 SAE document J1930. If you find a term or abbreviation in a 2001 or later manual that is unfamiliar to you, check this list. If a term is not listed below, it did not change. 2000 and Earlier Models 2001 or Later Models Description HONDA Abbreviations Description New Abbreviations SAE recommendation Brake Switch...
Page 32 2000 and Earlier Models 2001 or Later Models Description HONDA Abbreviations Description New Abbreviations SAE recommendation Intake Air Bypass Control IAB Control Solenoid Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Valve Control Solenoid Valve Intake Air Bypass Vacuum IAB Vacuum Tank...
Page 34 03/07/29 09:04:31 61S0X050_020_0001 Specifications Standards and Service Limits Engine Electrical ........................2-2 Engine Assembly ........................2-2 Cylinder Head ..........................2-3 Engine Block ..........................2-4 Engine Lubrication ......................2-5 Cooling ..............................
Page 35: Engine Electrical
03/07/29 09:04:31 61S0X050_020_0002 Standards and Service Limits Engine Electrical Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Ignition coil Rated voltage 12 V Firing order 1 4 2 5 3 6 Spark plug Type NGK: PZFR5F-11 DENSO: PKJ16CR-L11 1.0 1.1 mm (0.039 0.043 in.) 1.3 mm (0.051 in.) Ignition timing At idle (check...
Page 36: Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Head Warpage 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) Height 120.95 121.05 mm (4.762 4.766 in.) Camshaft End play 0.05 0.20 mm (0.002 0.008 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.) Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.050 0.089 mm (0.0020 0.0035 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Page 37: Engine Block
Standards and Service Limits Engine Block Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) Bore diameter 89.000 89.015 mm 89.065 mm (3.5039 3.5045 in.) (3.5065 in.) Bore taper 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) Reboring limit 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Page 38: Engine Lubrication
Engine Lubrication Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Engine oil Capacity Engine overhaul 5.0 (5.3 US qt) Oil change, 4.4 (4.6 US qt) including filter Oil change, 4.0 (4.2 US qt) without filter Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0.04 0.16 mm (0.002 0.006 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.) Pump housing-to-outer rotor clearance...
Page 39 Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit ATF (Automatic Capacity Fluid change 2.9 (3.1 US qt) Transmission Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) Overhaul 7.2 (7.6 US qt) Fluid) ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm in 850 910 kPa 800 kPa N or P position (8.7 9.3 kgf/cm , 120 130 psi)
Page 40 Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Valve body Stator shaft needle bearing contact I.D. Torque converter 27.000 27.021 mm (1.0630 1.0638 in.) When worn or side damaged ATF pump side 29.000 29.021 mm (1.1417 1.1426 in.) When worn or damaged ATF pump gear thrust clearance 0.03 0.06 mm (0.001 0.002 in.)
Page 41 Standards and Service Limits 4-speed Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential - 1999-2001 Models (cont’d) Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At stator shaft 22.984 23.000 mm (0.9049 0.9055 in.) When worn or area damaged At 3rd gear...
Page 42 Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At 4th gear 34.975 34.991 mm (1.3770 1.3776 in.) When worn or area damaged At 2nd gear 39.979 40.000 mm (1.574 1.575 in.) When worn or damaged At park gear 41.964 41.980 mm (1.6521 1.6528 in.) When worn or...
Page 43 Standards and Service Limits 4-speed Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential - 1999-2001 Models (cont’d) Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Secondary shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At 1st gear 37.978 37.993 mm (1.4952 1.4958 in.) When worn or area damaged At 2nd gear...
Page 44 Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coils Main valve body Modulator valve spring 1.6 mm 10.4 mm 33.5 mm spring (see page (0.063 in.) (0.409 in.) (1.319 in.) 14-198). Shift valve C spring 0.8 mm 6.6 mm 49.1 mm...
Page 45 Standards and Service Limits 4-speed Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential - 1999-2001 Models (cont’d) Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit A/T differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.010 18.028 mm (0.7091 0.7098 in.) carrier Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.023 0.057 mm (0.001 0.002 in.) 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) Driveshaft contact area I.D.
Page 46 Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit ATF (Automatic Capacity Fluid change 3.3 (3.5 US qt) Transmission Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) Overhaul 7.9 (8.3 US qt) Fluid) ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm in 900 960 kPa 850 kPa N or P position (9.2 9.8 kgf/cm , 130 140 psi)
Page 47 Standards and Service Limits 5-speed Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential - 1999-2001 Models (cont’d) Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Clutch 1st clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 3.10 mm (0.122 in.) When discolored Mark 2 3.20 mm (0.126 in.) When discolored Mark 3 3.30 mm (0.130 in.)
Page 48 Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At stator shaft 22.984 23.000 mm (0.9049 0.9055 in.) When worn or area damaged At 4th gear 52.975 52.991 mm (2.0856 2.0863 in.) When worn or damaged At 5th gear collar 33.975 33.991 mm (1.3376 1.3382 in.) When worn or...
Page 49 Standards and Service Limits 5-speed Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential - 2002-2004 Models (cont’d) Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At 5th gear 34.975 34.991 mm (1.3770 1.3776 in.) When worn or area damaged At 2nd gear...
Page 50 Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Secondary shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At 1st gear 37.978 37.993 mm (1.4951 1.4958 in.) When worn or area damaged At 2nd gear 33.986 33.999 mm (1.3380 1.3385 in.) When worn or damaged I.D.
Page 51 Standards and Service Limits 5-speed Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential - 2002-2004 Models (cont’d) Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coils Main valve body Shift valve D spring 0.7 mm 6.6 mm 33.7 mm 11.6 spring (see page (0.028 in.)
Page 52 Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coils Accumulator 1st accumulator spring B 2.3 mm 12.6 mm 42.0 mm body spring (see (0.091 in.) (0.496 in.) (1.654 in.) page 14-436). 1st accumulator spring A 2.4 mm 19.5 mm 67.7 mm...
Page 53 Power steering Capacity For fluid change 0.4 (0.42 US qt) fluid Use Honda Power Steering Fluid For system 1.1 (1.16 US qt) overhaul Power steering Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) Used belt: 13.0 16.5 mm (0.51 0.65 in.)
Page 54: Air Conditioning
Brakes - 1999-2001 Models Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit Parking brake Distance traveled when 3 5 clicks pedal pressed with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf) of force Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet removed) 164 mm (6 7/16 in.) Free play 1 5 mm (1/16 3/16 in.) Brake disc...
Page 55 Design Specifications Item Measurement Qualification Specification DIMENSIONS Overall length 5,110 mm (201.2 in.) Overall width 1,920 mm (75.6 in.) Overall height VAN, LX 1,740 mm (68.5 in.) EX, EXL 1,770 mm (69.7 in.) Wheelbase 3,000 mm (118.1 in.) Track Front 1,680 mm (66.1 in.) Rear 1,680 mm (66.1 in.)
Page 56 Item Measurement Qualification Specification STEERING Type Power-assisted rack and pinion Overall ratio 16.57 Turns, lock-to-lock 3.44 Steering wheel diameter 380 mm (15.0 in.) SUSPENSION Type Front Strut Rear Double wishbone Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled WHEEL ALIGNMENT Camber Front 0°...
Page 57 Design Specifications (cont’d) Item Measurement Qualification Specification ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V 20/5 HR 65A RATINGS Starter 12 V 1.6 kW Alternator 12 V 130A Fuses Under-hood fuse/relay box 120A, 50A, 40A, 30A, 20A, 15A, 7.5A Under-dash driver’s fuse/ 30A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A relay box Under-dash passenger’s 20A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A...
Page 58: Body Specifications
Body Specifications 1,740 mm (68.5 in.)* 1,770 mm (69.7 in.)* * : VAN, LX * : EX, EXL 2-25...
Page 60 03/07/29 09:06:11 61S0X050_030_0001 Maintenance Lubricants and Fluids ......................3-2 Maintenance Schedule Listed by Distance/Time for Nomal Conditions 1999-2000 Models ....................... 3-4 Listed by Distance/Time for Severe Conditions 1999-2000 Models ....................... 3-7 Listed by Distance/Time for Nomal Conditions 2001 Model ..............
Page 61: Lubricants And Fluids
For Refrigerant: HFC-134a (R-134a) 1: Always use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 2: Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system.
Page 62 NOTE: • Lubricate all hinges, latches, and locks once a year. • In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary. • We recommend Honda White Lithium Grease.
Page 63: Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule Listed by Distance/Time for Normal Conditions 1999-2000 Models This two-page Maintenance Schedule outlines the minimum required maintenance. Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions if the vehicle meets any of the qualifiers in the Severe Conditions schedule or if the vehicle is normally driven in Canada.
Page 64 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 65 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 66 Listed by Distance/Time for Severe Conditions 1999-2000 Models Use the Severe Conditions schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the following conditions; if only OCCASIONALLY driven in these conditions, use the Normal Conditions schedule. Severe Driving Conditions •...
Page 67 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term...
Page 68 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term...
Page 69 Maintenance Schedule Listed by Distance/Time for Normal Conditions 2001 Model This two-page Maintenance Schedule outlines the minimum required maintenance. Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions if the vehicle meets any of the qualifiers in the Severe Conditions schedule or if the vehicle is normally driven in Canada.
Page 70 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 71 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 72 Listed by Distance/Time for Severe Conditions 2001 Model Use the Severe Conditions schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the following conditions; if only OCCASIONALLY driven in these conditions, use the Normal Conditions schedule. Severe Driving Conditions •...
Page 73 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 74 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 75 Maintenance Schedule Listed by Distance/Time for Normal Conditions 2002-2003 Models This two-page Maintenance Schedule outlines the minimum required maintenance. Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions if the vehicle meets any of the qualifiers in the Severe Conditions schedule or if the vehicle is normally driven in Canada.
Page 76 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 77 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 78 Listed by Distance/Time for Severe Conditions 2002-2003 Models Use the Severe Conditions schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the following conditions; if only OCCASIONALLY driven in these conditions, use the Normal Conditions schedule. Severe Driving Conditions •...
Page 79 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 80 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 81 Maintenance Schedule Listed by Distance/Time for Normal Conditions 2004 Model This two-page Maintenance Schedule outlines the minimum required maintenance. Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions if the vehicle meets any of the qualifiers in the Severe Conditions schedule or if the vehicle is normally driven in Canada.
Page 82 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 83 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 84 Listed by Distance/Time for Severe Conditions 2004 Model Use the Severe Conditions schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the following conditions; if only OCCASIONALLY driven in these conditions, use the Normal Conditions schedule. Severe Driving Conditions •...
Page 85 Maintenance Schedule Listed by Distance/Time for Severe Conditions (cont’d) 2004 Model Use the Severe Conditions schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the following conditions; if only OCCASIONALLY driven in these conditions, use the Normal Conditions schedule. Severe Driving Conditions •...
Page 86 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 87 NOTE: According state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will not void the customer’s emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended intervals to ensure long-term reliability.
Page 88: Table Of Contents
03/07/29 09:07:12 61S0X050_040_0001 Engine Electrical Engine Electrical Special Tools ..........................4-2 Starting System Component Location Index ................. 4-3 Circuit Diagram ......................... 4-4 Starter Circuit Troubleshooting ..............4-5 Starter Solenoid Test .....................
Page 89 03/07/29 09:07:13 61S0X050_040_0002 Engine Electrical Special Tools Ref. No. Tool Number Description A973X-041-XXXXX Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07749-0010000 Driver...
Page 90 Starting System Component Location Index UNDER-DASH DRIVER’S FUSE/RELAY BOX (BACK SIDE) STARTER CUT RELAY Test, page 22-88 BATTERY TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH STARTER Test: Starter Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-5 1999-2001 models, page 14-173 Solenoid Test, page 4-6 2002-2004 models, page 14-403 Performance Test, page 4-7 Replacement: Replacement, page 4-8...
Page 91: Starting System
Starting System Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) ST HOT in START (III) STARTER DRIVER’S UNDER DASH RELAY FUSE/RELAY BOX No.13 (7.5A) BLK/YEL BLU/ORN BLU/WHT • TRANSMISSION • PGM FI RANGE SWITCH MAIN RELAY (Closed : P and N position) BLK/WHT SOLENOID...
Page 92: Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: 4. Check the battery condition. Check electrical • Air temperature must be between 59° and 100°F (15° connections at the battery, the negative battery and 38°C) during this procedure. cable to the body, engine ground cables, and the •...
Page 93: Starter Solenoid Test
Starting System Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Starter Solenoid Test (cont’d) 1. Disconnect the starter cable, BLK/WHT wire and starter motor wire. 6. Check the following items in the order listed until you find the open circuit. 2. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground).
Page 94: Starter Performance Test
Starter Performance Test 1. Disconnect the wires from the S terminal and the 5. Disconnect the battery also from the starter body. If M terminal. the pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly. 2. Make the connections as shown using as heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to the wire used for the vehicle).
Page 95: Starter Replacement
Starting System Starter Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure and the navigation system, then write down the the crimped side of the ring terminal (A) is facing frequencies for the radio’s preset buttons.
Page 96: Starter Overhaul
Starter Overhaul Disassembly/Reassembly END COVER BRUSH HOLDER ARMATURE HOUSING BRUSH ARMATURE 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) (Apply molybdenum disulfide.) VENT TUBE (Apply molybdenum disulfide.) STARTER SOLENOID SOLENOID LEVER GEAR HOUSING OVERRUNNING CLUTCH ASSEMBLY GEAR HOUSING COVER (cont’d)
Page 97 Starting System Starter Overhaul (cont’d) 1. Remove the starter (see page 4-8). 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is below the service limit, replace the armature. 2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning of this procedure. Commutator Diameter Standard (New): 28.0 28.1 mm (1.102 1.106 in.) Armature Inspection and Test...
Page 98 7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. proper depth.
Page 99 Starting System Starter Overhaul (cont’d) Starter Brush Inspection Starter Brush Holder Test 11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the 12. Check that there is no continuity between the ( ) service limit, replace the brush holder assembly. brush holder (A) and ( ) brush holder (B).
Page 100 14. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then Overrunning Clutch Inspection position the brush about halfway out of its holder, and release the spring to hold it there. 17. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft. Replace it if it does not slide smoothly. 18.
Page 101: Ignition System
Ignition System Component Location Index IGNITION COIL SPARK PLUG Replacement, page 4-17 Inspection, page 4-18 4-14...
Page 102 Circuit Diagram No.11 (15A) : 1999 2000 models No.7 (15A) : 2001 2004 models UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) BLK/YEL IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III) DRIVER’S UNDER DASH FUSE/RELAY BLK/YEL WHT/BLU BLK/RED YEL/GRN BLK/YEL...
Page 103: Ignition Timing Inspection
Ignition System Ignition Timing Inspection 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 6. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the timing data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3), belt cover. Check the ignition timing under a no and check for DTC’s.
Page 104: Ignition Coil Removal/Installation
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation 1. Remove the intake manifold cover (A) and ignition 2. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors, then coil cover(s) (B). remove the ignition coils. 1999-2001 models: 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 3.
Page 105: Spark Plug Inspection
Ignition System Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. 2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A); replace the spark plug if the gap is out of • Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: specification.
Page 106: Charging System
Charging System Component Location Index CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (In the gauge assembly) UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX Has built-in ELECTRICAL LOAD DETECTOR (ELD) UNIT BATTERY Test, page 22-87 ALTERNATOR BELT Inspection, page 4-26 Replacement, page 4-26 ALTERNATOR Alternator/Regulator Test, step 1 on page 4-23 Replacement, page 4-27 4-19...
Page 107 Charging System Circuit Diagram 1999-2001 models UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BATTERY No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) IGNITION SWITCH ELD UNIT IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III) BLK/YEL No.6 DRIVER’S (15A) UNDER DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX GRN/RED BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL CHARGING BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR...
Page 108 2002-2004 models UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) BLK/YEL IG1 HOT in ON (II) DRIVER’S and START (III) No.6 UNDER DASH (15A) FUSE/RELAY ELD UNIT BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL GRN/RED CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR LIGHT BULB G201 (1.4W) WHT/BLU WHT/GRN...
Page 109: Charging Circuit Troubleshooting
Charging System Charging Circuit Troubleshooting If the charging system indicator does not come on or 8. Connect the alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 does not go off, or the battery is dead or low, test the to body ground with jumper wire. Turn the ignition following items in the order listed: switch ON (II).
Page 110 Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test 9. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there. 1. Be sure the battery connections are good, and that the battery is sufficiently charged. (see page 22-87). Is the voltage less than 13.5 V ? 2.
Page 111 Charging System Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) Alternator Control System Test 7. Check for continuity between the PCM connector terminal C2 (1999-2000, 2002-2004 models) or B6 1. Check for proper operation of the electrical load (2001 model) and body ground. detector (ELD) by checking the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (see page 11-3).
Page 112 8. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF. 2002-2004 models: 9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. ALTC (WHT/GRN) C (WHT/GRN) 10. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P) (1999-2000, 2002-2004 models) or PCM connector B (24P) (2001 model) from the PCM. 11.
Page 113 Charging System Alternator-compressor Belt Alternator-compressor Belt Inspection Replacement 1999-2001 models 1. Remove the splash shield (2002-2004 models) (see step 28 on page 5-6). 1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damage. If the belt is cracked or damaged, replace it. 2.
Page 114: Alternator Replacement
Alternator Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio 5. Remove the mounting bolt (A) and alternator and the navigation system, then write down the bracket mounting bolt (B), then remove the harness frequencies for the radio’s preset buttons. clamp (C) from the alternator bracket.
Page 115: Auto-Tensioner Inspection
Charging System Auto-tensioner Inspection 1999-2001 models 5. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-29). 1. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator’s 6. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using two bolts pointer (A) with the engine not running. Start the (6 mm diameter) (B) and vise (C) as shown. Do not engine, then check the position of the pointer again.
Page 116: Auto-Tensioner Replacement
Auto-tensioner Replacement 2002-2004 models 1999-2001 models 1. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator’s 1. Remove the alternator-compressor belt (see page pointer (A) with the engine not running. Start the 4-26). engine, then check the position of the pointer again. If the position changes, replace the auto-tensioner.
Page 117 Charging System Auto-tensioner Replacement (cont’d) 2002-2004 models 5. After tightening, tighten the pivot bolt in two steps (45° per step). 1. Remove the alternator-compressor belt (see page 4-26). Specified Torque: 64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft) 2. Remove the auto-tensioner. 45°...
Page 118: Tensioner Pulley Replacement
Tensioner Pulley Replacement 1999-2001 models Remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand threads), and replace the tensioner pulley (B). 38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft) 4-31...
Page 119: Alternator Overhaul
Charging System Alternator Overhaul Exploded View - 1999-2001 models SPACER RING STATOR REAR BEARING BEARING DRIVE-END HOUSING RETAINER ROTOR FRONT BEARING PULLEY PULLEY LOCKNUT STATOR THROUGH BOLT VOLTAGE REGULATOR DIODE (RECTIFIER) ASSEMBLY REAR HOUSING BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY TERMINAL INSULATOR END COVER DUST SEAL 4-32...
Page 120 Special Tools Required 5. Remove the washer nut (A) and insulator (B) from • Driver 07749-0010000 the ‘‘B’’ terminal, then remove the end cover (C) • Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 and dust seal (D). NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure.
Page 121 Charging System Alternator Overhaul (cont’d) 7. Remove the voltage regulator. 9. Remove the four flange nuts. 8. Remove the four screws (A), then remove the 10. Remove the four insulators (A), rear housing (B) rectifier (B) and rubber seal (C). and washer (C).
Page 122 11. If you are not replacing the front bearing and/or 14. With a hammer and commercially available tools rear bearing, go to step 18. Otherwise, remove the shown, install a new rear bearing in the rotor shaft. rotor from the stator drive end housing. 12.
Page 123 Charging System Alternator Overhaul (cont’d) 16. Support the stator housing in a vise, and drive out Rectifier Test the front bearing with a brass drift (A) and hammer. 18. Check for continuity in each direction, between the B terminal (A) and P terminals (B), and between the E terminal (C) and P terminals (B) of each diode pair.
Page 124 Alternator Brush Inspection Stator Test 19. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with a 22. Check that there is continuity between each pair of vernier caliper (B). leads (A). • If either brush is shorter than the service limit, •...
Page 125 Charging System Alternator Overhaul (cont’d) Exploded View - 2002-2004 models REAR BEARING COVER REAR BEARING ROTOR BEARING RETAINER FRONT BEARING DRIVE-END HOUSING PULLEY PULLEY LOCKNUT SEAL RING SEAL RING TERMINAL INSULATOR END COVER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY REAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY 4-38...
Page 126 Special Tools Required 5. Remove the end cover (A) and seal ring (B). • Driver 07749-0010000 • Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. 1. Test the alternator and regulator before you remove them (see page 4-22).
Page 127 Charging System Alternator Overhaul (cont’d) 7. Remove the four bolts, then remove the rear 9. Inspect the rotor shaft for galling, and inspect the housing assembly (A), washer (B), and rear bearing bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for cover (C).
Page 128 12. With a hammer and special tools, install a new Rotor Slip Ring Test front bearing in the drive end housing. 14. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings (A). • If there is continuity, go to step 15. •...
Page 129: Cruise Control
Cruise Control Component Location Index SET/RESUME/CANCEL SWITCH Test, page 4-51 Replacement, page 4-51 MAIN SWITCH Test: 1999-2001 models, page 4-50 2002-2004 models, page 4-50 Replacement: 1999-2001 models, page 4-50 2002-2004 models, page 4-50 CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH (Built into gauge assembly) Test, page 4-51 Pedal Height Adjustment,...
Page 130 Circuit Diagram ( ) : 2002 2004models DRIVER’S UNDER DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) No.9 (10A) BLK/YEL No.47 No.6 IG1 HOT in ON (II) (20A) (15A) COMBINATION and START (III) LIGHT SWITCH HORN RELAY BLK/YEL...
Page 131 Cruise Control Symptom Troubleshooting Index NOTE: • The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. • Before troubleshooting. – check that the speedometer works properly. – check the No. 9 (10A) and No. 6 (15A) fuses in the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box, and No. 47 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Page 132 Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for Set speed does not cancel Check main switch Short to power: when main switch is pushed • 1999-2001 models (see page 4-50) LT GRN • 2002-2004 models (see page 4-50) Check cruise control unit inputs (see page 4-48) Set speed does not cancel Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-51) Open circuit, loose or...
Page 133 Cruise Control Cruise Control Communication Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine. 6. Reconnect the cruise control unit 14P connector and PCM connector A (32P) (1999-2000, 2002-2004 2. Turn on the cruise control main switch, then drive models) or PCM connector E (31P) (2001 model). the vehicle to speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with the cruise control.
Page 134 Is there about 1 V ? 9. Connect a voltmeter between PCM connector terminal A5 (1999-2000, 2002-2004 models) or E17 (2001 model) and body ground. Drive the vehicle at Check for loose connection of the BLU/GRN speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with the cruise wire between the cruise control unit and the PCM.
Page 135: Cruise Control Unit Input Test
Cruise Control Cruise Control Unit Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, 1999-2001 models (see page 23-18), 2002 model (see page 23-19), 2003-2004 models (see page 23-20), and the precautions and procedures (see page 23- 21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service.
Page 136 5. Reconnect the 14P connector, and make these input test: Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained BLK/YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the There should be battery voltage.
Page 137: Cruise Control Main Switch Test/Replacement
Cruise Control Cruise Control Main Switch Test/Replacement 1999-2001 models 2002-2004 models 1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument 1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument panel. panel. Terminal side of male terminals 2. Disconnect the 8P connector (B) from the switch. 2.
Page 138: Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
Cruise Control Set/Resume/Cancel Brake Pedal Position Switch Test Switch Test/Replacement 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the switch (A). 1. Remove the two screws (A), then remove the Terminal side of switch (B). male terminals Terminal side of male terminals 2.
Page 139 Cruise Control Cruise Control Actuator/Cable Cruise Control Actuator Cable Replacement Adjustment 1. Loosen the locknut (A), then disconnect the 1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves smoothly actuator cable (B) from the throttle linkage. with no binding or sticking. 2.
Page 140 5. Turn the adjusting nut (B) until it is 3.75 0.5 mm (0.15 0.02 in.) away from the bracket (C). 3.75 0.5 mm (0.15 0.02 in.) 6. Pull the cable so that the adjusting nut (B) touches the bracket, and tighten the locknut (A). 4-53...
Page 141 Engine Mount Control System Component Location Index POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Troubleshooting, page 4-56 FRONT MOUNT 4-54...
Page 142 Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BATTERY No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) IGNITION SWITCH IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III) BLK/YEL DRIVER’S No.6 UNDER DASH (15A) FUSE/RELAY BOX BLK/YEL ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE GRN/WHT G101 4-55...
Page 143: Troubleshooting
Engine Mount Control System Troubleshooting Special Tools Required 6. Measure voltage between the No. 2 terminal and Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 30 in.Hg body ground. A973X-041-XXXXX ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR NOTE: • Check the vacuum hoses and lines for damage and proper connections before troubleshooting.
Page 144 8. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 rpm. 12. Release the vacuum, then apply vacuum again. 9. Measure voltage between the engine mount Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness control solenoid valve 2P connector No. 1 terminal with and without vacuum applied ? and No.
Page 146 03/07/29 09:09:07 61S0X050_050_0001 Engine Mechanical Engine Assembly Engine Removal ........................5-2 Engine Installation ....................... 5-12 Cylinder Head ...................... . 6-1 Engine Block ......................7-1 Engine Lubrication ..................8-1 Intake Manifold and Exhaust System ....
Page 147: Engine Removal
03/07/29 09:09:08 61S0X050_050_0002 Engine Assembly Engine Removal NOTE: 4. Remove the intake manifold cover (A) and ignition • Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted coil cover (B) (2002-2004 models). surfaces. • To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors carefully while holding the connector portion. •...
Page 148 5. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister 7. Remove the battery. hose (A) (1999-2001 models) or vacuum hose (A) (2002-2004 models). 8. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors on the left side of the engine compartment. 1999-2001 models: 9. Remove the ground cable (A), relay bracket (B) and harness clamp (C).
Page 149 Engine Assembly Engine Removal (cont’d) 10. Remove the three mounting bolts (A) and loosen 12. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-215). the mounting bolt (B), then remove the battery base (C). 13. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose (B).
Page 150 15. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A). 17. Disconnect the powertrain control module (PCM) connectors from the PCM. 1999-2001 models: 18. Remove the engine wire harness clamps (A). 2002-2004 models: 19. Loosen the grommet mounting nuts (B), and turn the grommet (C) counterclockwise, then pull out 16.
Page 151 Engine Assembly Engine Removal (cont’d) 20. Remove the battery cable (A) from the under-hood 24. Remove the starter cable (A) and harness clamp (B). fuse/relay box, and remove the harness clamps (B). 21. Remove the alternator-compressor belt (see page 25. Remove the radiator cap. 4-26).
Page 152 29. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-13). 36. Remove the bolts (A) securing the shift cable holder (B), then remove the shift cable cover (C). 30. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). To prevent damage to the control lever joint, be Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer for sure to remove the bolts securing the shift cable 1999-2001 models (see page 14-137) or 2002-2004...
Page 153 Engine Assembly Engine Removal (cont’d) 39. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower 41. Remove the P/S hose clamp mounting bolts (A) and front mount and transmission lower rear mount. harness clamp (B). 40. Remove the stiffeners. 42. Remove the steering gearbox mount from the front subframe.
Page 154 43. Remove the bolts securing the rear mount. 46. Remove the heater hoses. 47. Remove the ATF cooler hoses, then plug the ATF 44. Lower the hoist, then remove the upper radiator cooler hoses and lines. hose (A) and lower radiator hose (B). 45.
Page 155 Engine Assembly Engine Removal (cont’d) 48. Attach the chain hoist to the engine as shown. 49. Remove the side engine mount bracket. 50. Remove the front mount bracket support nut. 5-10...
Page 156 51. Raise the hoist to full height. 54. Hang the steering gearbox with a rope to the frame. 52. Draw alignment marks on the front subframe. 55. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C hoses. 53. Remove the front subframe. 56.
Page 157: Engine Installation
Engine Assembly Engine Installation 1. Install the accessory brackets. Tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques. 10 x 1.25 mm 38 N·m REAR MOUNT (3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft) BRACKET 8 x 1.25 mm 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) P/S PUMP BRACKET FRONT MOUNT...
Page 158 2. Position the engine/transmission assembly under 4. Install the front subframe. Align the reference the vehicle. Attach the chain hoist to the engine, marks on the front subframe, then tighten the bolts. then lift the engine into position in the vehicle. Reinstall the mounting bolts/nuts in the sequence given.
Page 159 Engine Assembly Engine Installation (cont’d) 5. Install the transmission lower front mount and 7. Lower the hoist. transmission lower rear mount on the front subframe. 8. Tighten the front mount bracket support nut. 12 x 1.25 mm 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm 38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m,...
Page 160 11. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height. 14. Install the stiffeners. 10 x 1.25 mm 12. Remove the rope from the steering gearbox, and 59 N·m install it on the subframe. (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm...
Page 161 Engine Assembly Engine Installation (cont’d) 16. Install a new set ring on the end of each driveshaft, 21. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable on then install the driveshafts. Make sure each ring the control shaft. Do not bend the shift cable any ‘‘clicks’’...
Page 162 24. Install the splash shield. 29. Install the heater hoses. 25. Install the front tires/wheels. 26. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. 30. Install the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler hoses for 1999-2001 models (see page 14-156) or 27. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and lower 2002-2004 models (see page 14-389).
Page 163 Engine Assembly Engine Installation (cont’d) 31. Install the starter cable (A) and harness clamp (B). 36. Push in the powertrain control module (PCM) connectors. Install the grommet (A), then tighten the grommet mounting nuts (B). 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 8 x 1.25 mm 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Page 164 39. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A). 41. Install the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose (B), using new washers (C). 1999-2001 models: 1999-2001 models: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 2002-2004 models: 2002-2004 models: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 40.
Page 165 Engine Assembly Engine Installation (cont’d) 43. Install the cruise control actuator cable, then adjust 47. Connect the engine wire harness connectors on the it (see page 4-52). left side of the engine compartment. 44. Install the throttle cable, then adjust it (see page 11- 242).
Page 166 50. Install the ignition coil cover (A) and intake 60. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-16). manifold cover (B) (2002-2004 models). 61. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5). 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 62. Set the clock. 8.7 lbf·ft) 51.
Page 168 03/07/29 09:10:23 61S0X050_060_0001 Engine Mechanical Cylinder Head Special Tools ..........................6-2 Component Location Index ................. 6-3 DTC Troubleshooting ..................... 6-6 VTEC Solenoid Valve Test ..................6-10 Engine Compression Inspection ..............6-11 VTEC Rocker Arm Test ..........
Page 169 03/07/29 09:10:25 61S0X050_060_0002 Cylinder Head Special Tools Ref. No. Tool Number Description 07AAJ-PNAA100 Air Regulator 07HAH-PJ7A100 Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 07JAB-001020A Holder Handle 07MAB-PY3010A Holder Attachment, 50 mm Offset 07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 07PAD-0010000 Stem Seal Driver 07VAJ-P8A010A VTEC Air Adapter 070AJ-0030100...
Page 170 Component Location Index RUBBER SEAL ENGINE MOUNT REAR UPPER COVER BRACKET FRONT UPPER COVER TIMING BELT Inspection, page 6-19 Removal, page 6-20 Installation, page 6-23 LOWER COVER BACK COVER PULLEY BOLT Replacement, page 6-18 CRANKSHAFT PULLEY Replacement, page 6-18 RUBBER SEAL AUTO-TENSIONER TIMING BELT DRIVE PULLEY Replacement, page 6-33...
Page 171 Cylinder Head Component Location Index (cont’d) HEAD COVER GASKET CYLINDER HEAD BOLT WASHER RUBBER SEAL OIL CONTROL ORIFICE O-RING CYLINDER HEAD COVER Removal,page 6-34 Installation, page 6-34 CYLINDER HEAD CYLINDER HEAD GASKET CYLINDER HEAD GASKET O-RING DOWEL PINS OIL CONTROL ORIFICE...
Page 172 ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLIES Removal, page 6-38 Inspection, page 6-41 CAMSHAFT THRUST COVER O-RING CAMSHAFT Inspection, page 6-43 SPRING RETAINER VALVE KEEPERS VALVE KEEPERS SPRING RETAINER INTAKE VALVE SPRING SOLID DOWEL PINS (FRONT BANK) EXHAUST VALVE SPRING HOLLOW DOWEL INTAKE VALVE SEAL PINS (REAR BANK) EXHAUST VALVE SEAL...
Page 173 Cylinder Head DTC Troubleshooting DTC P1259: A problem in the VTEC Oil 7. Check for continuity on the VTEC oil pressure Pressure Switch circuit or VTEC Solenoid switch between the pressure switch 2P connector Valve circuit terminals No. 1 and No. 2. VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Special Tools Required 2P CONNECTOR...
Page 174 10. Measure voltage across the VTEC oil pressure 14. Remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (A). Install switch harness 2P connector. the special tools as shown, then reinstall the VTEC oil pressure switch. VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR 07NAJ-P07010A 07MAJ-PY40120 Wire side of female terminals...
Page 175 Cylinder Head DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 23. With the battery positive terminal still connected to 24. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the VTEC solenoid valve, measure voltage between PCM connector terminal C10 (1999-2000, 2002-2004 25. Disconnect the battery positive terminal from the models) or A20 (2001 model) and body ground.
Page 176 27. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector terminal and body ground. VTEC SOLENOID VALVE HARNESS 1P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminal Is there continuity? Repair a short in the wire between the PCM connector terminal B12 (1999-2000, 2002-2004 models) or B2 (2001 model) and VTEC solenoid valve connector.
Page 177: Vtec Solenoid Valve Test
Cylinder Head VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the VTEC 4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid solenoid valve. valve with your finger and check its movement. If the VTEC solenoid valve is OK, check the engine oil 2.
Page 178: Engine Compression Inspection
Engine Compression Inspection 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 8. Connect a tachometer. temperature (cooling fan comes on). 9. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the starter motor and measure the compression. 3.
Page 179: Vtec Rocker Arm Test
Cylinder Head VTEC Rocker Arm Test Special Tools Required 7. Remove the two end intake rocker shaft mounting • VTEC air adapter 07VAJ-P8A010A bolts, then install and connect the special tools as • VTEC air stopper 070AJ-0030100 shown. • Air regulator 07AAJ-PNAA100 FRONT: 1999-2001 models 07AAJ-PNAA100...
Page 180 2002-2004 models 9. Move the intake secondary rocker arm (A) for the No. 1 cylinder. The primary rocker arm (B) and secondary rocker arm should move together. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-34). If the intake primary rocker arm does not move, 2.
Page 181 Cylinder Head VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont’d) 7. Remove the two end intake rocker shaft mounting 9. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A) bolts, then install and connect the special tools as and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are shown.
Page 182: Valve Clearance Adjustment
Valve Clearance Adjustment 1. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-34). 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it 2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). Align back and forth;...
Page 183 Cylinder Head Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont’d) 7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 4 piston (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 5 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
Page 184 15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 6 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 6 cylinder. 17.
Page 185 Cylinder Head Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation Installation Special Tools Required • Holder handle 07JAB-001020A • Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A 1. Clean the pulleys (A), crankshaft (B), bolt (C) and • Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A washer (D). Lubricate with new engine oil as shown. or a commercially available 19 mm socket : Clean : Lubricate with new engine oil...
Page 186: Timing Belt Inspection
Timing Belt Inspection 1. Remove the ignition coil cover (’99-01 models). 3. Remove the front upper cover. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover (A) and ignition 4. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant coil cover (B) (2002-2004 models). soaking.
Page 187: Timing Belt Removal
Cylinder Head Timing Belt Removal 1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up 3. Remove the right front tire/wheel. with the pointer (B). 4. Remove the splash shield. 2. Check that the No.1 piston top dead center (TDC) mark (A) on the front camshaft pulley and the pointer (B) on the front upper cover are aligned.
Page 188 7. Support the engine with a jack and wood block 11. Remove the front upper cover (A), rear upper cover under the oil pan. (B) and lower cover (C). 8. Remove the side engine mount bracket. 12. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.
Page 189 Cylinder Head Timing Belt Removal (cont’d) 13. Screw in the battery clamp bolt as shown, to hold 15. Remove the idler pulley bolt (A) and idler pulley (B), the timing belt adjuster in its current position. then remove the timing belt. Tighten it by hand, do not use a wrench.
Page 190: Timing Belt Installation
Timing Belt Installation NOTE: The following procedure is for installing a new 3. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the timing belt. If you are installing a used timing belt, refer TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the to the next procedure (see page 6-29).
Page 191 Cylinder Head Timing Belt Installation (cont’d) 6. Hold the auto-tensioner (A) with the maintenance 9. Reinstall the maintenance bolt (A). Always use a bolt pointing up. Loosen and remove the new gasket (B) (1999 model). maintenance bolt (B) (1999 model). 8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m, NOTE: Handle the auto-tensioner carefully so the 6 lbf·ft)
Page 192 13. Install the auto-tensioner. 14. Screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position. NOTE: Make sure the holder (pin for ’00-04 models) Tighten it by hand, do not use a wrench. stays in place.
Page 193 Cylinder Head Timing Belt Installation (cont’d) 17. Tighten the idler pulley bolt. 18. Remove the holder (pin for 2000-2004 models) from the auto-tensioner. 1999 model: 10 x 1.25 mm 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) 2000-2004 models: 19. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. 6-26...
Page 194 20. Install the engine mount bracket. 22. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B) and rear upper cover (C). 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) 23.
Page 195 Cylinder Head Timing Belt Installation (cont’d) 26. Check the camshaft pulley marks. 28. Install and adjust the power steering (P/S) pump belt (see page 17-12). • If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to step 27. 29. Install the alternator-compressor belt (see page 4- •...
Page 196 Used Belt 3. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on Follow this procedure when installing a used timing the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the belt. back covers. 1.
Page 197 Cylinder Head Timing Belt Installation (cont’d) 4. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the timing 8. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. belt cannot be installed, perform the new belt installation procedure. 5. Apply liquid thread lock to the idler pulley bolt, then loosely install the idler pulley.
Page 198 10. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown. 14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). 11. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B) and rear upper cover (C). 15.
Page 199 Cylinder Head Timing Belt Installation (cont’d) 16. Install the dipstick and tube (A) with a new O-ring 20. Install the splash shield. (B). 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 21. Install the right front tire/wheel. 17. Install and adjust the P/S pump belt (see page 17- 12).
Page 200: Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement
Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-20). 2. Remove the auto-tensioner. 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-20). 3. Remove the bolt (A), then remove the timing belt 2. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (see adjuster (B) and collar (C).
Page 201: Cylinder Head Cover Removal
Cylinder Head Cylinder Head Cover Removal Cylinder Head Cover Installation 1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4). 1. Install the cylinder head covers. 2. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-17). NOTE: • Before installing the cylinder head cover, clean 3.
Page 202: Cylinder Head Removal
Cylinder Head Removal NOTE: 8. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-215). • Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces. 9. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose • To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors (B). carefully while holding the connector portion.
Page 203 Cylinder Head Cylinder Head Removal (cont’d) 11. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4). 16. Remove the fuel rails. 12. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-17). 1999-2001 models: 13. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-20). 14. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the cylinder head.
Page 204 17. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower 21. Remove the camshaft pulleys (A) and back cover radiator hose (B). (B). 22. Remove the cylinder head covers. 18. Remove the heater hoses. 23. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts, in sequence, 1/3 turn at a time.
Page 205: Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
Cylinder Head Cylinder Head Inspection for Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Warpage 1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-34). 1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-35). 2. Loosen the adjusting screws (A). 2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-43). 3.
Page 206 Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly NOTE: • Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations. • Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-41). • Rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused. •...
Page 207: Rocker Arm And Shaft
Cylinder Head Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly (cont’d) 2002-2004 models: INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT INTAKE ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY SPRING EXHAUST ROCKER EXHAUST ROCKER ARM A ARM B EXHAUST ROCKER SHAFT Letter A is stamped Letter B is stamped on rocker arm. on rocker arm.
Page 208: Rocker Arm And Shaft Inspection
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection 1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-38). 4. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition. 2. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location.
Page 209 Cylinder Head Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection (cont’d) VTEC Rocker Arms 6. Inspect the rocker arm piston (A). Push them manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: • Apply new engine oil to the pistons when reassembling.
Page 210: Camshaft Inspection
Camshaft Inspection 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-20). 4. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of the cylinder head. 2. Remove the rocker arms (see page 6-38). 5. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the 3.
Page 211 Cylinder Head Camshaft Inspection (cont’d) 7. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift 10. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, head. Measure the inside diameter of each scored, or excessively worn. camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of- round condition.
Page 212 11. Check total runout with the camshaft supported on 12. Measure cam lobe height. V-blocks. Cam Lobe Height Standard (New): • If the total runout of the camshaft is within the service limit, replace the cylinder head. INTAKE EXHAUST • If the total runout is beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft and recheck the oil 1999- 35.832 mm...
Page 213: Valve, Spring, And Valve Seal Removal
Cylinder Head Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve guide seal remover (A). • Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A • Valve spring compressor KD383 with No. 32 jaws, or CF811, commercially available • Valve guide seal remover KD3350, commercially available Identify the valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its...
Page 214: Valve Inspection
Valve Inspection 1999-2001 models 2002-2004 models 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-46). 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-46). 2. Measure the valve in these areas. 2. Measure the valve in these areas. Intake Valve Dimensions Intake Valve Dimensions A Standard (New): 33.90 34.10 mm A Standard (New):...
Page 215: Valve Stem-To-Guide Clearance Inspection
Cylinder Head Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-46). 3. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide, 2. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Page 216: Valve Guide Replacement
Valve Guide Replacement Special Tools Required 5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and • Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm • Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100 (0.1 in.) towards the combustion chamber.
Page 217 Cylinder Head Valve Guide Replacement (cont’d) 9. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside 10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the cutting oil. camshaft side of the head;...
Page 218: Valve Seat Reconditioning
Valve Seat Reconditioning 1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page 6- 5. Make one more very light pass with the 45° cutter 48). If the valve guides are worn, replace them (see to remove any possible burrs caused by the other page 6-49) before cutting the valve seats.
Page 219 Cylinder Head Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont’d) 8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and measure the valve stem installed height (A). Intake Valve Stem Installed Height Standard (New): 46.75 47.55 mm (1.841 1.872 in.) Service Limit: 47.80 mm (1.882 in.) Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height Standard (New): 46.68 47.48 mm (1.838 1.869 in.)
Page 220: Valve, Spring, And Valve Seal Installation
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the • Stem seal driver 07PAD-0010000 end of the valve spring with closely wound coils • Valve spring compressor attachment toward the cylinder head. 07757-PJ1010A •...
Page 221: Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, And Pulley Installation
Cylinder Head Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation 1. Apply a light coat of new engine oil around the 5. Loosen the valve adjusting screws. camshaft oil seal. 6. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely 2.
Page 222: Cylinder Head Installation
Cylinder Head Installation 9. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft Install the cylinder heads in the reverse order of pulley (B). removal: 8 x 1.25 mm 1. Clean the cylinder head and block surfaces. 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 2.
Page 223 Cylinder Head Cylinder Head Installation (cont’d) 4. Clean the timing belt drive pulley. 6. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on 5. Set the timing belt drive pulley to top dead center the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the (TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of back covers.
Page 224 7. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flanges of 9. Install the timing belt (see page 6-23). the cylinder head bolts. 10. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-15). 8. Tighten the cylinder head bolts sequentially in three steps. 11.
Page 225 Cylinder Head Cylinder Head Installation (cont’d) 15. Install the fuel rails. 16. Install the vacuum hoses (A) on the intake air bypass control thermal valve (B). 1999-2001 models: 6 x 1.0 mm 9.8 N·m(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm 17.
Page 226 18. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and lower 24. Install the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose radiator hose (B). (B), using new washers (C). 1999-2001 models: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 19. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-7). 20.
Page 227: Cmp (Tdc) Sensor Replacement
Cylinder Head Cylinder Head Installation (cont’d) CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement 26. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease page 6-20). to prevent corrosion. 2.
Page 228: Ckp Sensor Replacement
CKP Sensor Replacement 7. Remove the CMP (TDC) sensor (A) from the back 1. Remove the altenator-compressor belt (see page 4- cover. 26). 5 x 0.8 mm 2. Loosen the adjusting nut, locknut and mounting 4 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3 lbf·ft) bolt, then remove the power steering (P/S) pump belt (see step 6 on page 6-20).
Page 230 03/07/29 09:12:47 61S0X050_070_0001 Engine Mechanical Engine Block Special Tools ..........................7-2 Component Location Index ................. 7-3 Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection ........................... 7-6 Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement .......... . 7-7 Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement .....
Page 231 03/07/29 09:12:48 61S0X050_070_0002 Engine Block Special Tools Ref. No. Tool Number Description 070AD-RCA0100 Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 070AD-RCA0200 Driver Attachment, 106 mm 07749-0010000 Driver...
Page 232: Component Location Index
Component Location Index OIL PAN Removal, page 7-11 Installation, page 7-28 OIL SCREEN DOWEL PIN BAFFLE PLATE ENGINE BLOCK END COVER CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL Installation, step 23 on page 7-26 and page 7-29 O-RING DOWEL PIN WASHER O-RING O-RING DRIVE PLATE BOLT OIL PUMP A/T DRIVE PLATE Overhaul, page 8-8...
Page 233 Engine Block Component Location Index (cont’d) MAIN BEARING CAPS CRANKSHAFT End play, page 7-6 Inspection, page 7-14 Installation, page 7-23 MAIN BEARINGS THRUST WASHERS Oil clearance, page 7-7 Selection, page 7-7 DOWEL PIN...
Page 234 PISTON RINGS Replacement, page 7-21 SNAP RING PISTON PIN Removal, page 7-18 Installation, step 1 on page 7-20 Inspection, step 1 on page 7-19 PISTON Removal, page 7-12 Measurement, page 7-15 CONNECTING ROD End play, page 7-6 Small end measurement, step 1 on page 7-19 ENGINE BLOCK Cylinder bore inspection, step 4 on page 7-16...
Page 235: Connecting Rod And Crankshaft End Play Inspection
Engine Block Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection 1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-8). 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the 2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 7 on page 7-12). crankshaft.
Page 236: Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, (remove the engine if it’s still in the car), remove 1. Remove the main caps and bearing halves (see the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the page 7-12).
Page 237 Engine Block Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont’d) Main Bearing Selection 3. Use the crankshaft bore codes and journal codes to select the appropriate main bearings from the table. Crankshaft Bore Code Location Larger crank bore 1. Letters or bars have been stamped on the end of A or I B or II C or III...
Page 238: Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new, 1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half complete bearing with the same color code, and (see page 7-12).
Page 239 Engine Block Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont’d) Rod Bearing Selection Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations (Letters or Bars) Connecting Rod Bore Code Locations 3. Letters or bars have been stamped on the 1. Inspect the connecting rod for cracks and heat crankshaft No.
Page 240: Oil Pan Removal
Oil Pan Removal 1. If the engine is still in the vehicle, drain the engine oil (see page 8-5). 2. Remove the exhaust pipe A (see step 32 on page 5- 3. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and the two bolts (B) securing the transmission.
Page 241: Crankshaft And Piston Removal
Engine Block Crankshaft and Piston Removal 1. Remove the engine assembly (see page 5-2). 7. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B), and oil pump (C). 2. Remove the transmission: • 1999-2001 models (see page 14-138). • 2002-2004 models (see page 14-369). 3.
Page 242 9. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the 10. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/ crank pin at bottom dead center (BDC) for each bearings in order. cylinder. Remove the piston assembly by pushing on the connecting rod. Take care not to damage the 11.
Page 243: Crankshaft Inspection
Engine Block Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft Inspection (cont’d) Out-of-Round and Taper 15. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap 1. Remove the crankshaft from the cylinder block (see side bolts (B), then remove the bearing cap (C). page 7-12).
Page 244: Block And Piston Inspection
Block and Piston Inspection Straightness 1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block (see page 7-12). 6. Place the cylinder block on the surface plate. 2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks. 7. Clean and install the bearings on the No. 1 and No.
Page 245 Engine Block Block and Piston Inspection (cont’d) 4. Measure wear and taper in directions X and Y at Oversize three levels in each cylinder as shown. 0.25: 89.250 89.265 mm (3.5138 3.5144 in.) 0.50: 89.500 89.515 mm (3.5236 3.5242 in.) •...
Page 246: Cylinder Bore Honing
Cylinder Bore Honing 6. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore 1. Measure the cylinder bores (see step 4 on page 7- diameter and piston diameter. 16). If the cylinder block is to be reused, hone the cylinders and remeasure the bores. Scored or Piston-to-Block Clearance scratched cylinder bores must be honed.
Page 247: Piston, Pin, And Connecting Rod Replacement
Engine Block Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement Disassembly 4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to approximately 158°F (70°C), then remove the 1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block (see piston pin. page 7-12). 2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A) and turn them in the ring grooves until the end gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin bores (B).
Page 248 Inspection 3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and piston pin hole diameter on the NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin and connecting rod piston. when they are at room temperature. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Standard (New): 0.0050 to 0.0010 mm...
Page 249 Engine Block Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont’d) Reassembly 4. Install the piston pin (A). Assemble the piston (B) and connecting rod (C) with the embossed marks 1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A). (D) on the same side. 2.
Page 250: Piston Ring Replacement
Piston Ring Replacement 1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block (see 4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the page 7-12). cylinder bore 15 20 mm (0.6 0.8 in.) from the bottom. 2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston rings (B).
Page 251 Engine Block Piston Ring Replacement (cont’d) 6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 1D 7. After installing a new set of rings, measure the mark and the second ring (B) has a 2C mark. The ring-to-groove clearance.
Page 252: Crankshaft And Piston Installation
Crankshaft and Piston Installation Special Tools Required 6. Install the bearing halves in the cylinder block and • Driver 07749-0010000 connecting rods. • Driver attachment 106 070AD-RCA0200 7. Apply new engine oil to the main bearings and rod 1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt bearings.
Page 253 Engine Block Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont’d) 10. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (B) with 12. Set the crankshaft to Bottom Dead Center (BDC) for the arrow (C) facing the timing belt end of the the cylinder you are working on. engine.
Page 254 17. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap, 21. Torque the bearing cap bolts (A), then torque the then install the cap. bearing cap side bolts (B). Follow the numbered sequence shown. 18. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads. Torque the bolts (B) to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft).
Page 255 Engine Block Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont’d) The seal mating surface on the engine block end 25. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating cover should be dry. Apply a light coat of multi- surfaces. purpose grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal.
Page 256 28. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces. 32. Install the timing belt drive pulley (A), then install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (B). 29. Install the oil pump (A). –1 Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump (see page 8-10).
Page 257: Oil Pan Installation
Engine Block Oil Pan Installation Remove any old liquid gasket from the oil pan 6. Tighten the two bolts (A) securing the transmission, mating surfaces, bolts and bolt holes. then install the torque converter cover (B). 2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001 or 08718-003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the cylinder block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
Page 258: Pulley End Crankshaft Seal Installation - In Car
Pulley End Crankshaft Seal Transmission End Crankshaft Seal Installation - In Car Installation - In Car Special Tools Required Special Tools Required Oil seal driver 64 070AD-RCA0100 • Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver attachment 106 070AD-RCA0200 1. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 1.
Page 260 03/07/29 09:13:41 61S0X050_080_0001 Engine Mechanical Engine Lubrication Special Tools ..........................8-2 Component Location Index ................. 8-3 Oil Pressure Switch Test ................... 8-4 Oil Pressure Test ........................8-4 Engine Oil Replacement ...................
Page 261 03/07/29 09:13:41 61S0X050_080_0002 Engine Lubrication Special Tools Ref. No. Tool Number Description 070AD-RCA0100 Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 07912-6110001 Oil Filter Wrench...
Page 262 Component Location Index OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Circuit Diagram, O-RINGS page 22-96 Switch test, OIL CONTROL page 8-4 ORIFICES Oil pressure test, page 8-4 O-RING CONNECTING TUBE VTEC SOLENOID VALVE FILTER O-RING VTEC SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY BAFFLE PLATE DOWEL PIN O-RING OIL FILTER FEED PIPE DOWEL PIN...
Page 263: Engine Lubrication
Engine Lubrication Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the pressure switch (B). engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct: 1.
Page 264: Engine Oil Replacement
Engine Oil Replacement Engine Oil Filter Replacement NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be Special Tools Required replaced at every other oil change. Under severe Oil filter wrench 07912-6110001 conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil change.
Page 265 Engine Lubrication Engine Oil Filter Replacement (cont’d) 3. Install the oil filter by hand. 5. If eight numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the outside of the filter, use the following procedure to 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter tighten the filter.
Page 266: Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-5). 2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe. 3. Install the two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil filter feed pipe. Hold the nut with a wrench, then tighten the other nut.
Page 267: Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Oil Pump Overhaul Exploded View 6 x 1.0 mm ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 6 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4 lbf·ft) 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft) 1/8 in. BSPT (British standard pipe taper) 28 threads/inch. Use the proper liquid sealant. O-RING Replace.
Page 268 Inspection Special Tools Required Oil seal driver 64 070AD-RCA0100 1. Remove the screws from the pump housing, then Removal separate the housing and cover. 1. Drain the engine oil. 2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (B). If 2.
Page 269 Engine Lubrication Oil Pump Overhaul (cont’d) Installation 4. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (B). If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance 1. Remove the old oil seal from the oil pump. exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Page 270 5. Install the oil pump (A). 9. Install the oil pan on the cylinder block. –1 Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001 or 08718- 0003, evenly to the block mating surface of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
Page 271: Oil Pressure Switch Replacement
Engine Lubrication Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft) 2. Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch, then install the oil pressure switch. 8-12...
Page 272 03/07/29 09:14:13 61S0X050_090_0001 Engine Mechanical Intake Manifold and Exhaust System Intake Manifold Removal and Installation ........ . 9-2 Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation ..........................9-10 Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ......... 9-11...
Page 273 03/07/29 09:14:13 61S0X050_090_0002 Intake Manifold and Exhaust System Intake Manifold Removal and Installation Exploded View-1999-2001 models 8 x 1.25 mm INTAKE MANIFOLD 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) END PLATE BOOST PLATE GASKET 6 x 1.0 mm Replace. 6 x 1.0 mm GASKET 12 N·m 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
Page 274 Exploded View-2002-2004 models 6 x 1.0 mm UPPER COVER 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) Replace if it is cracked or if the mating surface is damaged. REAR INTAKE MANIFOLD CHAMBER INTAKE MANIFOLD Replace if it is cracked or FUNNEL if the mating surface is GASKET damaged.
Page 275 Intake Manifold and Exhaust System Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont’d) Removal 2. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (A) (1999-2001 models) or vacuum hose (A) 1. Remove the intake manifold cover (A) and ignition (2002-2004 models). coil cover(s) (B). 1999-2001 models: 1999-2001 models: 2002-2004 models:...
Page 276 4. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control 6. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (B). cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care not to bend the cables when removing them.
Page 277 Intake Manifold and Exhaust System Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont’d) 8. Remove the breather hose (A) and water bypass 10. Remove the intake manifold (1999-2001 models). hoses (B), then plug the water bypass hoses. 1999-2001 models: 2002-2004 models: 11. Remove the upper cover (A), then remove the intake manifold (B) and spacer (C) (2002-2004 models).
Page 278 Installation 3. Install the upper cover. Tighten the bolts and nuts sequentially in two or three steps. Always use a 1. Put the gasket and spacer on the injector base new intake manifold gasket (2002-2004 Models). (2002-2004 models). Specified torque: 2.
Page 279 Intake Manifold and Exhaust System Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont’d) 4. Install the breather hose (A) and water bypass 6. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and PCV hoses (B). hose (B). 1999-2001 models: 1999-2001 models: 2002-2004 models: 2002-2004 models: 5.
Page 280 10. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the 12. Install the ignition coil cover(s) (A) and intake vacuum hose(s) (B) and breather pipe (C). manifold cover (B). 1999-2001 models: 1999-2001 models: 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 2002-2004 models: 2002-2004 models: 6 x 1.0 mm...
Page 281 Intake Manifold and Exhaust System Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation NOTE: • Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. • Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets. FRONT: SELF-LOCKING NUT GASKET 8 x 1.25 mm 31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, Replace.
Page 282 Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. HEAT SHIELD 6 x 1.0 mm MUFFLER 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) HEAT SHIELD 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (SECONDARY HO2S) 44 N·m...
Page 284 03/07/29 09:15:07 61S0X050_100_0001 Engine Cooling Cooling System Component Location Index ................. 10-2 Coolant Temperature Gauge Testing ..........10-5 Sending Unit Test ........................ . 10-9 Radiator Cap Test ........................ . 10-10 Radiator Test ..........................
Page 285: Cooling System
03/07/29 09:15:09 61S0X050_100_0002 Cooling System Component Location Index RADIATOR FAN SHROUD Replacement, page 10-16 RADIATOR FAN LOWER RADIATOR HOSE UPPER RADIATOR HOSE RADIATOR CAP RESERVOIR TANK FAN MOTOR Test, page 10-11 O-RING DRAIN PLUG ATF COOLER HOSES RADIATOR Replacement, page 10-16 A/C CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY Replacement, page 10-16 Fan Motor Test, page 10-11...
Page 286 1999-2001 models: HEATER HOSES UPPER RADIATOR HOSE WATER BYPASS HOSES HEATER VALVE THERMOSTAT COVER WATER PASSAGE RADIATOR LOWER RADIATOR HOSE 2002-2004 models: UPPER RADIATOR HOSE HEATER HOSES HEATER VALVE THERMOSTAT COVER LOWER RADIATOR HOSE RADIATOR (cont’d) 10-3...
Page 287 Cooling System Component Location Index (cont’d) DOWEL PIN RADIATOR FAN SWITCH B EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE SENDING UNIT (1999-2000 models) Test, page 10-9 ENGINE COOLANT GASKET TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR O-RING GASKETS WATER PUMP Inspection, page 10-12 Replacement, page 10-12 O-RINGS RADIATOR FAN SWITCH A...
Page 288 Coolant Temperature Gauge Test 1999-2000 models Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Does Not Move at All - 2001 model 1. Check the No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ relay box before testing. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect powertrain control module (PCM) connector 2.
Page 289 Cooling System Coolant Temperature Gauge Test (cont’d) Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Does 4. Connect the negative cable to the battery. Turn the Not Move at All - 2002-2004 models ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage between PCM connector terminal E14 and body ground.
Page 290 Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Goes 4. Connect the negative cable to the battery. Turn the Past the Hot Mark - 2001 model ignition switch ON (ll), and measure voltage between PCM connector terminal A31 and body ground. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Page 291 Cooling System Coolant Temperature Gauge Test (cont’d) Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Goes 5. Check for continuity between PCM connector Past the Hot Mark - 2002-2004 models terminal E14 and gauge assembly connector terminal C2. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) negative cable from the battery.
Page 292: Sending Unit Test
Sending Unit Test 1999-2000 models 5. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A31 and gauge assembly connector terminal C2. 1. Disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) from the coolant temperature gauge sending unit (B). PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) ECTOUT (YEL/GRN) (YEL/GRN) GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C (16P) Wire side of female terminals...
Page 293: Radiator Cap Test
Cooling System Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test 1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its seal with 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine (B) (commercially available).
Page 294: Fan Motor Test
Fan Motor Test Thermostat Test 1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan Replace the thermostat if it is open at room motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B). temperature. Terminal side of male terminals To test a closed thermostat: 1.
Page 295: Water Pump Inspection
Cooling System Water Pump Inspection Water Pump Replacement 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-20). 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-13). 2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. 2. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-20). Check that it turns freely. 3.
Page 296: Coolant Replacement
3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the engine NOTE: coolant. • Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. • Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water.
Page 297 5 minutes, then turn off the engine. AIR FLOW TEMPERATURE °F (°C) 12. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed. 13. Set the temperature control dial to maximum. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm for 5 minutes, then turn off the engine.
Page 298: Thermostat Replacement
Thermostat Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio’s preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable. 3.
Page 299: Radiator And Fan Replacement
Cooling System Radiator and Fan Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio 6. Remove the battery. and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio’s preset buttons. 7. Remove the engine wire harness connectors from the battery base.
Page 300 9. Remove the three mounting bolts (A) and loosen 11. Remove the upper radiator hose (A), lower radiator mounting bolt (B), then remove the battery base (C). hose (B) and automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler hoses (C). Plug the ATF cooler hoses and lines.
Page 301 Cooling System Radiator and Fan Replacement (cont’d) 14. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the radiator fan 16. Pull up the radiator (A), then remove the lower shroud, then remove the radiator fan shroud cushions (B), ATF cooler line (C), radiator cap (D), assembly (B) from the battery side.
Page 302: Component Location Index
Fan Controls Component Location Index UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX RELAY BOX CONDENSER FAN RELAY Test, page 22-88 RADIATOR FAN RELAY Test, page 22-88 RADIATOR FAN SWITCH A Test, page 10-25 RADIATOR FAN MAIN RELAY Test, page 22-88 RADIATOR FAN SWITCH B Test, page 10-25 A/C CONDENSER RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY...
Page 303: Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Fan Controls Symptom Troubleshooting Index Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for Radiator fan does not run at all, Radiator and condenser fan circuit troubleshooting A (see but condenser fan runs with A/C page 10-22). Both radiator fan and condenser Check the No. 3 (15A) fuse in the driver’s under-dash fan do not run on low or high fuse/relay box.
Page 304: Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) No.57 (30A) No.58 (30A) IG2 HOT in ON (II) DRIVER’S UNDER DASH No.3 FUSE/RELAY (7.5A) RADIATOR CONDENSER RELAY RELAY BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLU/BLK BLU/RED BLU/YEL CONDENSER FAN MOTOR BLU/RED BLK/YEL RADIATOR...
Page 305: Radiator And Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting A
Fan Controls Radiator and Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting A NOTE: Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index 4. Connect a jumper wire between radiator fan relay before troubleshooting. 4P socket terminals No. 1 and No. 2. 1. Check the No. 57 (30A) fuse in the under-hood RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET fuse/relay box.
Page 306: Radiator And Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting B
Radiator and Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting B 7. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector. 8. Measure the voltage between fan motor 2P NOTE: Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. before troubleshooting. 1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch A 2P connector. RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR 2.
Page 307: Radiator And Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting C
Fan Controls Radiator and Condenser Fan Circuit Radiator and Condenser Fan High Troubleshooting C Speed Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index NOTE: Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index before troubleshooting. before troubleshooting. 1. Remove the condenser fan relay, and test it (see 1.
Page 308: Radiator Fan Switch Test
Radiator Fan Switch Test 6. Connect a jumper wire between radiator fan switch 1. Remove radiator fan switch A from the water B 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. passage and radiator fan switch B from the cylinder head (see page 10-4).
Page 310 03/07/29 09:17:42 61S0X050_110_0001 Fuel and Emissions Fuel and Emissions Systems Special Tools ............11-2 Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect General Troubleshooting Fitting Installation ....... 11-225 Information ............ . 11-3 Fuel Pressure Regulator DTC Troubleshooting Index . 11-6 Replacement ......
Page 311 03/07/29 09:17:43 61S0X050_110_0002 Fuel and Emissions Systems Special Tools Ref. No. Tool Number Description A973X-041-XXXXX Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0 4 in.Hg 07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set 07VAJ-0040100 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment 07XAA-001010A Fuel Sender wrench 07406-004000A Fuel Pressure Gauge 11-2...
Page 312: General Troubleshooting Information
General Troubleshooting Information Intermittent Failures 2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS or an OBD II scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) The term ‘‘intermittent failure’’ means a system may located under the driver’s side of the dashboard. have had a failure, but it checks OK now.
Page 313 Fuel and Emissions Systems General Troubleshooting Information (cont’d) How to Reset the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing You can reset the PCM in either of 2 ways: If the inspection for a trouble code requires voltage or resistance checks at the PCM connectors, remove the •...
Page 314 How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM How to Substitute the PCM for Testing Purposes Special Tools Required • Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a Use this procedure if you need a known-good PCM to commercially available digital multimeter test a vehicle. It allows you to swap a PCM from a •...
Page 315: Dtc Troubleshooting Index
Fuel and Emissions Systems DTC Troubleshooting Index Temporary Detection Item Page (MIL indication ) P0107 (3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-95) Low Voltage P0108 (3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-98) High Voltage P0112 (10) Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Low (see page 11-102)
Page 316 Temporary Detection Item Page (MIL indication ) P0301 (71) P1399 No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected (see page 11-133) (see page 11-134) P0302 (72) P1399 No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected (see page 11-133) (see page 11-134) P0303 (73) P1399 No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected (see page 11-133) (see page 11-134) P0304 (74)
Page 317 Fuel and Emissions Systems DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) Temporary Detection Item Page (MIL indication ) P1106 (13) P1106 Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Range/ (see page 11-152) Performance Problem P1107 (13) Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low (see page 11-153) Voltage P1108 (13) Barometric Pressure (BARO) Circuit High Voltage...
Page 318: Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Troubleshooting Index These symptoms DO NOT trigger diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) or cause the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to come on. If the MIL is reported on, check for DTCs. If the vehicle has one of these symptoms, do the diagnostic procedure for it, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
Page 319: System Descriptions
Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions Electronic Control System The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the powertrain control module (PCM). Fail-safe Function When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, the PCM ignores that signal and assumes a pre-programmed value for that sensor that allows the engine to continue to run.
Page 320 Trouble Code consisting of one letter and 4 numbers. Depending on the detected, there is no (DTC) problem, as SAE-defined code (P0xxx) or a Honda-defined output. code (P1xxx) will be output to the tester. Engine Speed The PCM computes engine speed from the signals sent Nearly the same as from the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
Page 321 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Data (cont’d) Data Description Operating Value Freeze Data Fuel System Fuel system status is indicated as ‘‘open’’ or ‘‘closed’’. At idle speed: closed Status Closed: Based on the HO2S output, the PCM determines the air/fuel ratio and controls the amount of injected fuel.
Page 322 PCM Electrical Connections ’99-00 Models PGM-FI MAIN RELAY IGNITION SWITCH FUEL PUMP STARTER BATTERY B1 IGP1 PG1 B2 RELAY B9 IGP2 PG2 B10 A24 STSW IMOFPR A15 B21 VBU B20 LG1 INJECTORS B22 LG2 No. 1 INJ1 B11 No. 2 C20 TDC1 INJ2 B5 No.
Page 323 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Electrical Connections ’99-00 Models (cont’d) To IMMOBILIZER IMOCD A25 UNIT IMOEN A13 To IMMOBILIZER UNIT C28 VCC2 SENSOR To MULTIPLEX C27 TPS ILU A28 CONTROL UNIT (DRIVER’S) C18 SG2 To GAUGE ASSEMBLY VALVE LIFT TEST TACHOMETER...
Page 324 ATSFTP A11 VREF A7 ABS/TCS TPSOUT A31 CONTROL UNIT * PFINH E3 FPTDR E1 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH OP2SW D13 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH OP3SW B24 LOCK UP CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE LC D1 GAUGE SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A ASSEMBLY SHA D7 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B A14 D4IND...
Page 325 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Electrical Connections ’01 Model PGM-FI MAIN RELAY IGNITION SWITCH FUEL PUMP STARTER PG1 A5 BATTERY A3 IGP1 RELAY A2 IGP2 PG2 A4 E8 STSW IMOFPR E1 A1 VBU A26 LG1 INJECTORS A25 LG2 No.
Page 326 To IMMOBILIZER IMOCD E31 UNIT IMOEN E30 To IMMOBILIZER UNIT ECTOUT E14 To COOLANT TEMPERATURE A30 VCC2 To MULTIPLEX SENSOR ILU E15 CONTROL UNIT A15 TPS (DRIVERS) A28 SG2 To GAUGE ASSEMBLY VALVE POSITION TEST TACHOMETER A16 EGRP NEP E3 SENSOR CONNECTOR B3 EGR...
Page 327 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Electrical Connections ’01 Model (cont’d) ATSFTP D11 VREF D9 ABS/TCS TPSOUT D16 CONTROL UNIT * PFINH D5 FPTDR D3 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH OP2SW C11 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH OP3SW C19 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE LC C10 GAUGE...
Page 328 PCM Electrical Connections ’02-04 Models PGM-FI MAIN RELAY IGNITION SWITCH FUEL PUMP STARTER BATTERY B1 IGP1 PG1 B2 RELAY B9 IGP2 PG2 B10 A24 STSW IMOFPR A15 B21 VBU B20 LG1 INJECTORS B22 LG2 No. 1 INJ1 B11 No. 2 CMPA INJ2 B5 (TDC1)
Page 329 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Electrical Connections ’02-04 Models (cont’d) To IMMOBILIZER CONTROL IMOCD E2 UNIT-RECEIVER To IMMOBILIZER CONTROL IMOEN E12 UNIT-RECEIVER C28 VCC2 SENSOR To DRIVER’S MULTIPLEX ILU A28 C27 TPS CONTROL UNIT C18 SG2 To GAUGE ASSEMBLY VALVE POSITION...
Page 330 ATSFTP E17 VREF E6 ABS/TCS TPSOUT E5 CONTROL UNIT * PFINH E7 From FUEL GAUGE E15 FLS05 * FPTDR E16 SENDING UNIT, GAUGE ASSEMBLY 4TH CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH OP4SW B19 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH OP3SW D13 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE LC D1 GAUGE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A...
Page 331 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P) ’99-00 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number GRN/WHT MCS (ENGINE MOUNT Drives engine mount At idle, not in P or N position: about 0 V CONTROL SOLENOID...
Page 332 PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P) ’99-00 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number GRN/ORN MIL (MALFUNCTION Drives MIL With MIL ON: 0 V INDICATOR LAMP) With MIL OFF: battery voltage NEP (ENGINE SPEED...
Page 333 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P) ’99-00 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number YEL/BLK IGP1 (POWER SOURCE) Power source for PCM control With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage circuit...
Page 334 PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (31P) ’99-00 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number BLK/WHT PO2SHTC (PRIMARY HEATED Drives primary heated With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER oxygen sensor heater With fully warmed up engine running: duty...
Page 335 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector D (16P) ’99-00 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number LC (LOCK-UP CONTROL Drives lock-up control With lock-up ON: battery voltage SOLENOID VALVE)
Page 336 PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (12P) (With ABS/TCS) ’99-00 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number PNK/BLK FPTDR (FRAME TO Detects engine retard With TCS operating: about 5 V POWERTRAIN TORQUE request signal With TCS not operating: about 2.5 V...
Page 337 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (31P) ’01 Model Wire side of female teminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number WHT/YEL VBU (VOLTAGE BACK UP) Power source for the PCM Battery voltage at all times circuit.
Page 338 PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (24P) ’01 Model Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number GRN/YEL VTSOL (VTEC SOLENOID Drives VTEC solenoid valve With engine at low rpm: about 0 V VALVE) With engine at high rpm: battery voltage EGR (EXHAUST GAS...
Page 339 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (22P) ’01 Model Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number (A/T CLUTCH Ground for A/T clutch PRESSURE CONTROL pressure control solenoid SOLENOID VALVE A...
Page 340 PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector D (17P) (With ABS/TCS) ’01 Model Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number PNK/BLK FPTDR (FRAME TO Detects engine retard With TCS operating: about 5 V POWERTRAIN TORQUE request signal With TCS not operating: about 2.5 V...
Page 341 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (31P) ’01 Model Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number GRN/YEL IMOFPR (IMMOBILIZER Drives fuel pump 0 V for 2 seconds after turning ignition switch ON FUEL PUMP RELAY)
Page 342 PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (31P) ’01 Model Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number WHT/RED SHO2S (SECONDARY Detects secondary HO2S With throttle fully opened from idle with fully HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (sensor 2) signal warmed up engine: above 0.6 V...
Page 343 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P) ’02-04 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number WHT/RED SHO2S (SECONDARY Detects secondary HO2S With throttle fully opened from idle and fully warmed up HEATED OXYGEN...
Page 344 PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P) ’02-04 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number GRN/ORN MIL (MALFUNCTION Drives MIL With MIL ON: 0 V INDICATOR LAMP) With MIL OFF: battery voltage NEP (ENGINE SPEED...
Page 345 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P) ’02-04 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number YEL/BLK IGP1 (POWER SOURCE) Power source for the PCM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage control circuit...
Page 346 PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (31P) ’02-04 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number BLK/WHT PO2SHTC (PRIMARY HEATED Drives primary heated With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER oxygen sensor heater With fully warmed up engine running: duty...
Page 347 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector D (16P) ’02-04 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number LC (TORQUE COVERTER Drives torque converter With lock-up ON: battery voltage CLUTCH SOLENOID...
Page 348 PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (20P) ’02-04 Models Wire side of female terminals NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V. Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal number IMOIND (IMMOBILIZER Drives immobilizer With immobilizer indicator ON: 0 V INDICATOR) indicator With immobilizer indicator OFF: battery voltage...
Page 349 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) Vacuum Hose Routing ’99-01 Models MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR To ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL To EVAPORATIVE SOLENOID VALVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL CANISTER EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LEAK CHECK PORT FRONT OF VEHICLE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR...
Page 350 Vacuum Hose Routing ’02-04 Models MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER To EVAPORATIVE PURGE VALVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL CANISTER To ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FRONT OF VEHICLE INTAKE AIR BYPASS CONTROL THERMAL VALVE (cont’d) 11-41...
Page 351 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) Vacuum Distribution ’99-00 Models ENGINE MOUNT ENGINE COOLANT PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and (PRIMARY HO2S) (SENSOR 1) LIFT SENSOR SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE (SECONDARY HO2S) (SENSOR 2) THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR...
Page 352 Vacuum Distribution ’01 Model ENGINE MOUNT ENGINE COOLANT PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (PRIMARY EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and HO2S) (SENSOR 1) POSITION SENSOR SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE (SECONDARY HO2S) (SENSOR 2) THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR...
Page 353 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) Vacuum Distribution ’02-04 Models ENGINE ENGINE MOUNT MOUNT ENGINE ENGINE COOLANT COOLANT PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (PRIMARY EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and HO2S) (SENSOR 1) POSITION SENSOR SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE (SECONDARY HO2S) (SENSOR 2) THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR...
Page 354 PGM-FI System Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor input is used by the PCM determine The Programmed Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system is a timing for fuel injection of each cylinder and to detect sequential multiport fuel injection system. engine speed. A/C Compressor Clutch Relay When the PCM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays compressor engagement, and...
Page 355 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases into electrical signals to the PCM. as the intake air temperature increases.
Page 356 Primary Heated Oxygen Sensors (Primary HO2S) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The primary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the exhaust gas and sends signals to the PCM which varies throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the the duration of fuel injection accordingly.
Page 357 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch PGM-FI Main Relay The PSP switch signals the PCM when the power The PGM-FI relay contains 2 separate relays. One is steering load is high. energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies battery voltage to the PCM, power to the fuel injectors, Starter (Ignition) Switch and power for the second relay.
Page 358 Catalytic Converter System Intake Air Bypass Control Thermal Valve When the engine is running, the intake air bypass control thermal valve sends air to the injectors. Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon INJECTOR monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor.
Page 359 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control EVAP Two Way Valve and EVAP Bypass Solenoid System Valve The EVAP two way valve is located between the fuel Refer to the System Diagram to see a functional layout tank and the EVAP canister line.
Page 360 Idle Control System Diagram The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the idle air control (IAC) valve: • After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the idle speed.
Page 361 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The PCM memory includes the ideal EGR valve lift for varying operating conditions.
Page 362 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram (’99-00 Models) The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is temporarily stored in the EVAP control canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned. •...
Page 363 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram (’01-04 Models) The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is temporarily stored in the EVAP control canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned. •...
Page 364 ’02-04 models: FUEL TANK VAPOR EVAP CANISTER VENT TUBE VENT SHUT FUEL TANK VAPOR VALVE FTP SENSOR from SIGNAL TUBE No.6 ECU EVAP FUEL TANK (PCM) TWO WAY FUEL TANK CRUISE VAPOR CONTROL VALVE BLK/YEL VAPOR VALVE CONTROL RECIRCULATION (15A) YEL/BLU TUBE (in the driver’s...
Page 365 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’99-00 Models VCC1 YEL/RED RED/GRN MAP SENSOR GRN/WHT RED/WHT RED/WHT GRN/BLK ECT SENSOR To CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT (EX model) RED/YEL GRN/BLK IAT SENSOR VCC2 YEL/BLU YEL/BLU GRN/BLK RED/BLK TP SENSOR JUNCTION CONNECTOR D EGRP...
Page 366 PHO2S GRN/BLK BLK/YEL PO2SHTC BLK/WHT PRIMARY HO2S (SENSOR 1) VBSOL JUNCTION BLK/YEL CONNECTOR D BLK/YEL C101 VTSOL GRN/YEL BLK/ VTEC SOLENOID VALVE VTPSW BLU/BLK BRN/BLK VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH BRN/BLK BRN/BLK JUNCTION CONNECTOR B G101 JUNCTION CONNECTOR C TDC1 TDC1 SENSOR 1 TDC2 TDC2...
Page 367 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’99-00 Models (cont’d) ALTC WHT/GRN ALTF WHT/RED VSSOUT To GAUGE BLU/WHT ASSEMBLY LOCK UP CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE BLU/YEL SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A GRN/WHT SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C NMSG INPUT SAHFT...
Page 368 YEL/BLK INJ1 No.1 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ2 No.2 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ3 No.3 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ4 No.4 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ5 BLK/RED No.5 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ6 WHT/BLU No.6 INJECTOR YEL/BLK IACV BLK/BLU IAC VALVE JUNCTION IGP1 CONNECTOR A YEL/BLK IGP2 YEL/BLK JUNCTION CONNECTOR C (cont’d) 11-59...
Page 369 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’99-00 Models (cont’d) C203 SHO2S WHT/RED WHT/RED GRN/BLK BLK/YEL SO2SHTC BLK/WHT BLK/WHT SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) C303 BLK/YEL GRN/WHT GRN/WHT ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE RED/YEL RED/YEL BLK/YEL EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE BLU/GRN CRUISE...
Page 370 OP2SW BLU/BLK 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH C151 OP3SW WHT/RED 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH IMOCD To IMMOBILIZER UNIT IMOEN GRN/ORN JUNCTION CONNECTOR D D4IND GRN/BLK BLK/BLU C402 RED/BLK RED/BLK ATPNP BLU/WHT C102 C303 GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR K ATPR BLU/BLK C301 DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH C102 CONNECTOR E...
Page 371 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’99-00 Models (cont’d) C501 LT GRN/WHT LT GRN/WHT BLK/YEL EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE YEL/BLU LT GRN LT GRN GRN/BLK 2WBS FTP SENSOR C101 BLK/YEL WHT/YEL EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B...
Page 372 CONNECTOR Q BLU/ORN CONNECTOR O RED/WHT BLK/YEL WHT/BLK WHT/YEL C201 CONNECTOR P CONNECTOR A BLK/YEL DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX From SRS UNIT LT BLU DATA LINK BRN/BLK CONNECTOR WHT/GRN G501 WHT/BLK WHT/ WHT/YEL C203 BRAKE SWITCH C202 WHT/ C553 BLK/YEL BLK/YEL FUEL PUMP WHT/GRN...
Page 373 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’99-00 Models (cont’d) CONNECTOR C BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BRN/BLK To A/C BLU/RED PRESSURE SWITCH BLU/RED CONNECTOR H BRN/BLK WHT/YEL BLU/RED CONNECTOR I BLK/YEL CONNECTOR J WHT/YEL BRN/BLK PASSENGER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B CONNECTOR D WHT/GRN...
Page 374 BLK/YEL IGPLS1 YEL/GRN SPARK PLUG No. 1 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS2 SPARK PLUG No. 2 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS3 SPARK PLUG No. 3 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS4 SPARK PLUG No. 4 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS5 BLK/RED SPARK PLUG No. 5 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS6 WHT/BLU...
Page 375 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’99-00 Models (cont’d) C302 ATSFTP * LT GRN LT GRN VREF * WHT/RED ORN/WHT TPSOUT * RED/BLK RED/BLU C504 PFINH * LT GRN/RED LT GRN/RED FPTDR * PNK/BLK PNK/BLK ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT * : with ABS/TCS 11-66...
Page 376 PCM Circuit Diagram ’01 Model VCC1 YEL/RED RED/GRN MAP SENSOR JUNCTION GRN/WHT CONNECTOR D RED/WHT RED/WHT GRN/BLK ECT SENSOR To CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT (EX model) RED/YEL GRN/BLK IAT SENSOR VCC2 YEL/BLU YEL/BLU GRN/BLK RED/BLK TP SENSOR JUNCTION CONNECTOR D EGRP WHT/BLK EGR VALVE POSITION...
Page 377 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’01 Model (cont’d) PHO2S GRN/BLK BLK/YEL PO2SHTC BLK/WHT PRIMARY HO2S (SENSOR 1) VBSOL JUNCTION BLK/YEL CONNECTOR B BLK/YEL C101 VTSOL GRN/YEL BLK/ VTEC SOLENOID VALVE VTPSW BLU/BLK BRN/BLK VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH BRN/BLK...
Page 378 ALTC WHT/GRN ALTF WHT/RED VSSOUT To GAUGE BLU/WHT ASSEMBLY TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE BLU/YEL SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A GRN/WHT SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C NMSG INPUT SAHFT (MAINSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR NCSG OUTPUT SAHFT (COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR A/T CLUTCH...
Page 379 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’01 Model (cont’d) YEL/BLK INJ1 No.1 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ2 No.2 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ3 No.3 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ4 No.4 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ5 BLK/RED No.5 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ6 WHT/BLU No.6 INJECTOR YEL/BLK IACV BLK/BLU IAC VALVE...
Page 380 C203 SHO2S WHT/RED WHT/RED GRN/BLK BLK/YEL SO2SHTC BLK/WHT BLK/WHT SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) C203 BLK/YEL GRN/WHT GRN/WHT ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL C303 SOLENOID VALVE RED/YEL RED/YEL BLK/YEL EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE BLU/GRN CRUISE CONTROL UNIT IMOIND WHT/YEL IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR TACHOMETER GAUGE ASSEMBLY C303 TEST TACHOMETER...
Page 381 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’01 Model (cont’d) OP2SW BLU/BLK 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH C151 OP3SW WHT/RED 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH IMOCD To IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER IMOEN GRN/ORN JUNCTION BLU/WHT CONNECTOR B D4IND GRN/BLK BLK/BLU C402 RED/BLK RED/BLK...
Page 382 C501 LT GRN/WHT LT GRN/WHT BLK/YEL EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE YEL/BLU LT GRN LT GRN GRN/BLK 2WBS FTP SENSOR C101 BLK/YEL WHT/YEL EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B BLK/YEL GRN/ BLU/ GRN/BLK WHT/ YEL/BLU CONNECTOR E BLK/YEL C102 BLK/YEL...
Page 383 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’01 Model (cont’d) CONNECTOR Q BLU/ORN CONNECTOR O RED/WHT BLK/YEL WHT/BLK WHT/YEL C201 CONNECTOR P CONNECTOR A BLK/YEL DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX From SRS UNIT LT BLU DATA LINK BRN/BLK CONNECTOR WHT/GRN G501...
Page 384 CONNECTOR C BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BRN/BLK To A/C BLU/RED PRESSURE SWITCH BLU/RED CONNECTOR H BRN/BLK WHT/YEL BLU/RED CONNECTOR I BLK/YEL CONNECTOR J WHT/YEL BRN/BLK PASSENGER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX WHT/ C202 CONNECTOR B CONNECTOR D WHT/GRN C201 CONNECTOR C WHT/YEL WHT/YEL C203 BLK/YEL GRN/RED GRN/RED...
Page 385 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’01 Model (cont’d) BLK/YEL IGPLS1 YEL/GRN SPARK PLUG No. 1 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS2 SPARK PLUG No. 2 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS3 SPARK PLUG No. 3 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS4 SPARK PLUG No.
Page 386 C302 ATSFTP * LT GRN LT GRN VREF * WHT/RED ORN/WHT TPSOUT * RED/BLK RED/BLU PFINH * LT GRN/RED FPTDR * PNK/BLK ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT ECTOUT To COOLANT YEL/GRN TEMPERATURE GAUGE ASSEMBLY * : with ABS/TCS (cont’d) 11-77...
Page 387 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’02-04 Models VCC1 YEL/RED YEL/RED GRN/RED MAP SENSOR JUNCTION GRN/WHT CONNECTOR B YEL/RED RED/WHT RED/WHT GRN/YEL ECT SENSOR To CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT RED/YEL GRN/YEL IAT SENSOR VCC2 YEL/BLU YEL/BLU GRN/YEL RED/BLK TP SENSOR JUNCTION...
Page 388 PHO2S GRN/YEL BLK/YEL PO2SHTC BLK/WHT PRIMARY HO2S (SENSOR 1) VBSOL BLK/YEL JUNCTION CONNECTOR B BLK/YEL C101 VTSOL GRN/YEL BLK/ BLK/ VTEC SOLENOID VALVE VTPSW BLU/BLK BRN/YEL VTEC PRESSURE SWITCH BRN/YEL BRN/YEL JUNCTION CONNECTOR C G101 JUNCTION CONNECTOR B CMPA(TDC1) CMP SENSOR A CMPA(TDC1) (TDC SENSOR 1) CMPB(TDC2)
Page 389 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’02-04 Models (cont’d) ALTC WHT/GRN ALTF WHT/RED VSSOUT To GAUGE BLU/WHT ASSEMBLY TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE BLU/YEL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A GRN/WHT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C C151 G151 A/T CLUTCH...
Page 390 YEL/BLK INJ1 No. 1 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ2 No. 2 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ3 No. 3 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ4 No. 4 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ5 BLK/RED No. 5 INJECTOR YEL/BLK INJ6 WHT/BLU No. 6 INJECTOR YEL/BLK IACV BLK/RED IAC VALVE JUNCTION CONNECTOR A IGP1 YEL/BLK IGP2...
Page 391 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’02-04 Models (cont’d) C203 SHO2S WHT/RED WHT/RED GRN/BLK BLK/YEL SO2SHTC BLK/WHT BLK/WHT SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) C203 BLK/YEL GRN/WHT GRN/WHT ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C302 C102 RED/YEL RED/YEL RED/YEL BLK/YEL EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE...
Page 392 OP4SW BLU/YEL 4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH C151 OP3SW BLU/WHT 3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID IMOCD PRESSURE SWITCH To IMMOBILIZER UNIT IMOEN GRN/ORN JUNCTION CONNECTOR B DIND GRN/BLK BLU/BLK C402 RED/BLK RED/BLK ATPNP BLU/WHT JUNCTION CONNECTOR C ATPR C102 C302 GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR K BLU/BLK...
Page 393 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’02-04 Models (cont’d) C501 LT GRN/WHT LT GRN/WHT BLK/YEL EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE YEL/BLU LT GRN LT GRN GRN/BLK 2WBS FTP SENSOR C101 BLK/YEL WHT/RED EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B...
Page 394 CONNECTOR Q BLU/ORN CONNECTOR O RED/WHT BLK/YEL WHT/BLK WHT/YEL C201 CONNECTOR P CONNECTOR A BLK/YEL DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX From SRS UNIT LT BLU DATA LINK BRN/YEL CONNECTOR WHT/GRN G501 WHT/BLK WHT/ WHT/YEL BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH C401 C202 WHT/ C553 BLK/YEL BLK/YEL...
Page 395 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’02-04 Models (cont’d) CONNECTOR C BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BRN/YEL To A/C BLU/RED PRESSURE SWITCH BLU/RED CONNECTOR H BRN/BLK WHT/YEL BLU/RED CONNECTOR I BLK/YEL CONNECTOR J WHT/YEL BRN/YEL PASSENGER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B CONNECTOR D WHT/GRN...
Page 396 BLK/YEL IGPLS1 YEL/GRN SPARK PLUG No. 1 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS2 BLU/RED SPARK PLUG No. 2 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS3 WHT/BLU SPARK PLUG No. 3 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS4 SPARK PLUG No. 4 IGNITION COIL BLK/YEL IGPLS5 BLK/RED SPARK PLUG No.
Page 397 Fuel and Emissions Systems System Descriptions (cont’d) PCM Circuit Diagram ’02-04 Models (cont’d) C504 C302 ATSFTP * LT GRN LT GRN LT GRN VREF * WHT/RED WHT/RED WHT/RED TPSOUT * RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK PFINH * LT GRN/RED LT GRN/RED LT GRN/RED FPTDR * PNK/BLK PNK/BLK...
Page 398: How To Set Readiness Codes
How to Set Readiness Codes Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness (In Relation to Readiness Codes) Code The vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness codes’’ that are part NOTE: of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. • Do not turn the ignition switch OFF during the If the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected or gone procedure.
Page 399 Fuel and Emissions Systems How to Set Readiness Codes (cont’d) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control HO2S Monitor and Readiness Code System Monitor and Readiness Codes NOTE: NOTE: • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the • All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is procedure.
Page 400 Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code EGR Monitor and Readiness Code • This readiness code is always set to available NOTE: because misfiring is continuously monitored. • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the • Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if procedure.
Page 401: Component Location Index
PGM-FI System Component Location Index ELECTRICAL LOAD DETECTOR (ELD) Troubleshooting, page 11-153 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR Troubleshooting, page 11-95 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR INTAKE AIR Troubleshooting, TEMPERATURE page 11-110 (IAT) SENSOR Troubleshooting, page 11-102 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Troubleshooting, page 11-106 TOP DEAD CENTER 1 (TDC1)/...
Page 402 ’99-00 models INJECTORS Replacement, page 11-177 ’01 model INJECTORS Replacement, page 11-177 (cont’d) 11-93...
Page 403 PGM-FI System Component Location Index (cont’d) ’02-04 models INJECTORS Replacement, page 11-179 DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) General Troubleshooting Information, page 11-3 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) General Troubleshooting Information, page 11-3 Troubleshooting, page 11-5 11-94...
Page 404: Dtc Troubleshooting
DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0107 ’99-00 Models: MAP Sensor Is there about 5 V ? Circuit Low Voltage Repair open in the wire between the PCM 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (C19) and the MAP sensor. 2. Check the MAP with the scan tool or the HDS. Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck (see page 11-5).
Page 405 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0107 ’01 Model: MAP Sensor Circuit Is there about 5 V ? Low Voltage Repair open in the wire between the PCM 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (A31) and the MAP sensor. 2.
Page 406 DTC P0107 ’02-04 Models: MAP Sensor Is there about 5 V ? Circuit Low Voltage Repair open in the wire between the PCM 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (C19) and the MAP sensor. 2. Check the MAP with the scan tool or the HDS. Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck (see page 11-5).
Page 407 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0108 ’99-00 Models: MAP Sensor 9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P Circuit High Voltage connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
Page 408 DTC P0108 ’01 Model: MAP Sensor Circuit 9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P High Voltage connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
Page 409 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0108 ’02-04 Models: MAP Sensor 9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P Circuit High Voltage connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
Page 410 DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected Expected 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan 2.
Page 411 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0112 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 8. Check the temperature reading on the scan tool. Sensor Circuit Low Voltage If the engine is warm, the reading will be higher than ambient temperature. If the engine is cold, the 1.
Page 412 DTC P0112 ’01 Model: IAT Sensor Circuit 8. Check the temperature reading on the scan tool. Low Voltage If the engine is warm, the reading will be higher than ambient temperature. If the engine is cold, the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). IAT and ECT will have the same value.
Page 413 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0113 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 10. Connect PCM connector terminals C18 and C25 Sensor Circuit High Voltage with a jumper wire. PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models. 1.
Page 414 DTC P0113 ’01 Model: IAT Sensor Circuit 10. Connect PCM connector terminals A14 and A28 High Voltage with a jumper wire. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) 2. Check the IAT with the scan tool or the HDS. 4°F ( 20°C) or less ( or L-Limit in the HDS), or 5 V indicated?
Page 415 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0116: ECT Sensor Range/Performance DTC P0117 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: Problem Sensor Circuit Low Voltage NOTE: If DTC P0117 and/or P0118 are stored at the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). same time as DTC P0116, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0116.
Page 416 DTC P0117 ’01 Model: ECT Sensor Circuit 7. Check the continuity between ECT sensor 2P Low Voltage connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. ECT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Check the ECT with the scan tool or the HDS. (RED/WHT) Is 302°F ( 150°C) or higher ( or H-Limit in the HDS), or 0 V indicated?
Page 417 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0118 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Sensor Circuit High Voltage 9. Remove the jumper wire. NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models. 10. Connect PCM connector terminals C18 and C26 with a jumper wire.
Page 418 DTC P0118 ’01 Model: ECT Sensor Circuit 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. High Voltage 9. Remove the jumper wire. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Connect PCM connector terminals A13 and A28 2. Check the ECT with the scan tool or the HDS. with a jumper wire.
Page 419 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0122 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: TP Sensor 9. At the sensor side, measure resistance between TP Circuit Low Voltage sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR to ’02-04 models.
Page 420 12. At the wire harness side, check for continuity 14. At the wire harness side, check for continuity between TP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 between TP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. and body ground. TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR TPS (RED/BLK)
Page 421 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0122 ’01 Model: TP Sensor Circuit 9. At the sensor side, measure resistance between TP Low Voltage sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the throttle fully closed. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
Page 422 12. At the wire harness side, check for continuity 14. At the wire harness side, check for continuity between TP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 between TP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. and body ground. TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR TPS (RED/BLK)
Page 423 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0123 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: TP Sensor 8. Measure voltage between PCM connector Circuit High Voltage terminals C18 and C28. PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models. SG2 (GRN/BLK) SG2 (GRN/YEL)* 1.
Page 424 DTC P0123 ’01 Model: TP Sensor Circuit 8. Measure voltage between PCM connector High Voltage terminals A28 and A30. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
Page 425 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1121: TP Sensor Signal Lower Than DTC P1122: TP Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected Expected 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool or the 2.
Page 426 DTC P0128 ’02-04 Models: Cooling System 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Malfunction 2. Make sure the A/C off. NOTE: If the DTCs listed below are stored at the same time as DTC P0128, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then 3.
Page 427 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0131 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: Primary 11. Check for continuity between primary HO2S HO2S (Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). PRIMARY HO2S (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR 2.
Page 428 DTC P0131 ’01 Model: Primary HO2S 11. Check for continuity between primary HO2S (Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). PRIMARY HO2S (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR 2.
Page 429 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0132 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: Primary 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. HO2S (Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage 10. Connect PCM connector terminals C16 and C18 NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies with a jumper wire.
Page 430 DTC P0132 ’01 Model: Primary HO2S 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage 10. Connect PCM connector terminals A6 and A28 with 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). a jumper wire. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
Page 431 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0133: Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) Circuit Slow Response NOTE: If DTC P0131, P0132 and/or P0135 are stored at the same time as DTC P0133, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0133. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 2.
Page 432 DTC P0137 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 10. Check for continuity between secondary HO2S Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Circuit Low (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body Voltage ground. SECONDARY HO2S NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR to ’02-04 models.
Page 433 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0137 ’01 Model: Secondary HO2S 10. Check for continuity between secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR 2.
Page 434 DTC P0138 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 8. Check the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) output Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Circuit High voltage with the scan tool or the HDS. Voltage Is there 1.0 V or more? NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models.
Page 435 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0138 ’01 Model: Secondary HO2S 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage 10. Connect PCM connector terminals E7 and E18 with 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). a jumper wire. PCM CONNECTORS E (31P) 2.
Page 436 DTC P0139: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Circuit Slow Response 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 3. Check the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) output voltage at 3,000 rpm with the scan tool or the HDS.
Page 437 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0135 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: Primary 6. Check for continuity between body ground and HO HO2S (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction 2S 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4 individually. DTC P0141 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: Secondary HO2S(Sensor 2) Heater Circuit HO2S 4P CONNECTOR Malfunction...
Page 438 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. terminal C1 (A8) and body ground. 14. Reconnect the HO2S (primary or secondary ) PCM CONNECTORS (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 ) 4P connector. PO2SHTC C (31P) (BLK/WHT) 15.
Page 439 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0135 ’01 Model: Primary HO2S 6. Check for continuity between body ground and (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction HO2S 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4 individually. DTC P0141 ’01 Model: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction HO2S 4P CONNECTOR NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies...
Page 440 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. terminal B5 (E2) and body ground. 14. Reconnect the HO2S (primary or secondary ) PCM CONNECTORS (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 ) 4P connector. PO2SHTC (BLK/WHT) B (24P) 15.
Page 441 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0171: Fuel System Too Lean 5. Connect a vacuum pump to the EVAP canister purge valve on the EVAP canister side. DTC P0172: Fuel System Too Rich 6. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P NOTE: If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at connector.
Page 442 DTC P0300: Random misfire and any combination of the following: DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0305: No.
Page 443 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0301 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: No. 1 7. Check for a DTC or Temporary DTC with the scan Cylinder Misfire Detected tool or the HDS. DTC P0302 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: No. 2 Is DT C P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or Cylinder Misfire Detected P0306, or T emporary DT C P1399 indicated? DTC P0303 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models:...
Page 444 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 23. Measure voltage between ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. 15. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR with one from another cylinder. 16. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes. 17.
Page 445 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 27. Check for continuity between body ground and the 28. Connect ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 1 PCM connector terminal (see table). and body ground with a jumper wire (see table). PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR IGPLS3 (BLU) IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU)*...
Page 446 Is there continuity? 35. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to step 30. 36. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the problem cylinder. Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the ignition coil. 37. Measure resistance between injector 2P connector terminals No.
Page 447 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 42. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. 48. Check for continuity between body ground and the PCM connector terminal (see table). Does the misf ire occur in the other cylinder where PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) the injector was exchanged? INJ4 (YEL) INJ2 (RED)
Page 448 DTC P0301 ’01 Model: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire 49. Connect injector 2P connector terminal No. 2 (No. 1 Detected on ’99-00 models) to body ground with a jumper wire (see table). DTC P0302 ’01 Model: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR DTC P0303 ’01 Model: No.
Page 449 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. 18. Check for a DTC or a Temporary DTC with the scan tool or the HDS. Does the misf ire occur in the cylinder where the ignition coil was exchanged? Is DT C P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306, or T emporary DT C P1399 indicated? Replace the faulty ignition coil.
Page 450 Is there continuity? 24. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 25. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P Repair short in the wire between the PCM connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. and the ignition coil. IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR Go to step 28.
Page 451 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 29. Check for continuity between body ground and 34. Measure voltage between body ground and the PCM connector terminal (see table). PCM connector terminal (see table). PCM CONNECTOR B (24P) PCM CONNECTOR B (24P) INJ2 (RED) IGPLS2 (RED) INJ3 (BLU) IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
Page 452 37. Measure resistance between injector 2P connector 43. Turn the ignition switch OFF. terminals No. 1 and No. 2. 44. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the problem cylinder. INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR 45. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 46. Measure voltage between injector 2P connector terminal No.
Page 453 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 48. Check for continuity between body ground and PROBLEM WIRE PCM connector terminal (see table). CYLINDER COLOR No. 1 P0301 PCM CONNECTOR B (24P) No. 2 P0302 INJ2 (RED) No. 3 P0303 No. 4 P0304 INJ3 (BLU) INJ1 (BRN) No.
Page 454 DTC P0325 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: Knock 7. Connect C103 knock sensor connector terminal Sensor Circuit Malfunction No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). KNOCK SENSOR SUBHARNESS 1P CONNECTOR (C103) 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
Page 455 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0325 ’01 Model: Knock Sensor Circuit 7. Connect C103 knock sensor connector terminal Malfunction No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). KNOCK SENSOR SUBHARNESS 1P CONNECTOR (C103) 2.
Page 456 DTC P0335 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 6. Check for continuity between body ground and CKP Sensor Circuit No Signal sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 individually. DTC P0336 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: CKP SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption 1.
Page 457 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0335 ’01 Model: CKP Sensor Circuit 10. Check for continuity between body ground and No Signal PCM connector terminal C8. PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) DTC P0336 ’01 Model: CKP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption (BLU) 1.
Page 458 6. Check for continuity between body ground and CKP 10. Check for continuity between body ground and sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 PCM connector terminal A12. individually. PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) CKP SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR (BLU) Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of male terminals Is there continuity?
Page 459 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0340 ‘03-04 Models: CMP Sensor A SENSOR SENSOR WIRE No Signal TERMINAL TERMINAL COLOR CMP A P0340 DTC P0341 ‘03-04 Models: CMP Sensor A P0341 Intermittent Interruption CMP B P0365 P0366 DTC P0365 ‘03-04 Models: CMP Sensor B No Signal Is there 1,850 2,450...
Page 460 DTC P0560 ’01 Model: Low Voltage in PCM 9. Measure resistance between the terminals of the Back Up Circuit indicated sensor on the PCM connector (see table). PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) NOTE: If the No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP (7.5A) fuse in the passenger’s under-dash fuse/relay box is removed and CMPA CMPA...
Page 461 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1106: BARO Sensor Circuit Range/ 5. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal Performance Problem A1 and body ground. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan (WHT/YEL) comes on, then let it idle.
Page 462 DTC P1107: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage DTC P1297 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: Circuit Low Voltage DTC P1108: BARO Sensor Circuit High Voltage 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 2. Start the engine. 2.
Page 463 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1297 ’01 Model: ELD Circuit Low 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Voltage 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 10. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM connector terminal A30.
Page 464 DTC P1298 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Circuit High Voltage 9. Disconnect PCM connector E (31P). 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 10. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM connector terminal E19. 2. Start the engine. 3.
Page 465 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 9. Connect ELD 3P connector terminal No. 3 to body 12. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector ground with a jumper wire. terminal No. 2 and body ground. ELD 3P CONNECTOR ELD 3P CONNECTOR (BLK) (GRN/RED) JUMPER WIRE...
Page 466 DTC P1298 ’01 Model: ELD Circuit High 9. Connect ELD 3P connector terminal No. 3 to body Voltage ground with a jumper wire. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). ELD 3P CONNECTOR 2. Start the engine. 3. Turn on the headlights. Is DT C P1298 indicated? (GRN/RED) JUMPER WIRE...
Page 467 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1361 ’99-00, ’02 Models: TDC Sensor 12. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector 1 Circuit Intermittent Interruption terminal No. 2 and body ground. ELD 3P CONNECTOR DTC P1362 ’99-00, ’02 Models: TDC Sensor 1 Circuit No Signal DTC P1366 ’99-00, ’02 Models: TDC Sensor...
Page 468 5. Measure resistance between the terminals of 9. Measure resistance between the terminals of the indicated sensor (see table). indicated sensor on the PCM connector (see table). TDC1/TDC2 SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) TDC1 TDC1 (GRN) (RED) TDC1 TDC1 TDC2 TDC2...
Page 469 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1361 ’01 Model: TDC Sensor 1 Circuit SENSOR SENSOR WIRE Intermittent Interruption TERMINAL TERMINAL COLOR TDC1 P1361 DTC P1362 ’01 Model: TDC Sensor 1 Circuit P1362 No Signal TDC2 P1366 P1367 DTC P1366 ’01 Model: TDC Sensor 2 Circuit Intermittent Interruption Is there 1,850 2,450...
Page 470 DTC P1676 ’99-00 Models: FPTDR Signal 9. Measure resistance between the terminals of the Line Failure indicated sensor on the PCM connector (see table). 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) TDC1 (GRN) Start the engine, and wait 10 seconds. Is DT C P167 6 indicated? TDC2 (YEL)
Page 471 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1676 ’01 Model: FPTDR Signal Line 6. Check for continuity between ABS/TCS control unit Failure 16P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector terminal E1. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). PCM CONNECTOR E (12P) FPTDR (PNK/BLK) 2.
Page 472 DTC P1676 ’02-04 Models: FPTDR Signal 6. Check for continuity between ABS/TCS control unit Line Failure 16P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector terminal D3. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). PCM CONNECTOR D (17P) FPTDR (PNK/BLK) 2. Start the engine, and wait 10 seconds. Is DT C P167 6 indicated? Go to step 3.
Page 473 PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1678: FPTDR Signal Line Failure 6. Check for continuity between ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector terminal E16. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). PCM CONNECTOR E (20P) 2.
Page 474 DTC P0607: PCM Back Up Circuit Malfunction DTC P1607: PCM Internal Circuit Malfunction 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3.
Page 475 PGM-FI System MIL Circuit Troubleshooting ’99-00, ’02-04 Models 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models. Does the MIL come on and stay on f or more than 20 seconds af ter turning the ignition switch ON 1.
Page 476 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II) again. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is the low oil pressure indicator on? 12. Inspect the ACGS (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Go to step 7. Is the f use OK ? Check for these problems: Go to step 13.
Page 477: Mil Circuit Troubleshooting
PGM-FI System MIL Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 16. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these 21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure sensors, one at a time, and check for continuity voltage between body ground and PCM connector between body ground and PCM connector terminal terminals B2, B10, B20, and B22 individually.
Page 478 ’01 Model 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 24. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). 1. Connect the HDS (see page 11-4). 25. Check for continuity between PCM connector 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. terminal A10 and body ground. Does the HDS communicate with the PCM? PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Go to step 3.
Page 479 PGM-FI System MIL Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II) again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). Is the low oil pressure indicator on? Does the MIL come on and stay on f or more than 20 seconds af ter turning the ignition switch ON Go to step 7.
Page 480 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these sensors, one at a time, and check for continuity 12. Inspect the ACGS (15A) fuse in the under-hood between body ground and PCM connector fuse/relay box. terminals A30, A31, and E6 individually.
Page 481 PGM-FI System MIL Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF. voltage between body ground and PCM connector terminals A4, A5, A25, and A26 individually. 24. Disconnect PCM connector E (31P). 25.
Page 482: Dlc Circuit Troubleshooting
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: 4. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No. 5 and • If the PCM does not communicate with the HDS, do No. 16. this troubleshooting. • Check that the MIL circuit is normal, then do this DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) troubleshooting.
Page 483 PGM-FI System DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 7. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 11. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). and body ground. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) 13.
Page 484 ’01 Model 4. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No. 5 and No. 16. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) 2. Measure voltage between data link connector (DLC) terminal No. 16 and body ground. GND (BRN/YEL) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) B (WHT/GRN) (WHT/GRN)
Page 485 PGM-FI System DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 7. Disconnect PCM connector E (31P). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 11. Disconnect PCM connector E (31P). and body ground. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) 13.
Page 486: Injector Replacement
Injector Replacement ’99-01 models 1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-215). 2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake manifold (see page 9-4). 3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A). 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 4. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose from the fuel pressure regulator (B). Place a rag or a shop towel over the hoses before disconnecting them.
Page 487 PGM-FI System Injector Replacement (cont’d) 8. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the fuel injectors (B). 9. Coat the new O-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors. 10. Insert the injectors into the fuel rail (D). 11.
Page 488 ’02-04 models 1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-215). 2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake manifold (see page 9-4). 3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A). 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 4. Remove the retainer bolts (B) from the fuel rails (C) and harness holders (D), then discard the O-rings (E). 5.
Page 489 PGM-FI System Injector Replacement (cont’d) 7. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B). 8. Coat new O-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors. 9. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D). 10. Coat new seal rings (E) with clean engine oil, and press them into the intake manifold. 11.
Page 490: Primary Ho2S Replacement
Primary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the primary HO2S 4P connector (A), 1.
Page 491: Idle Control System
Idle Control System Component Location Index POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH Troubleshooting, page 11-196 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE Troubleshooting, page 11-184 *: The illustration shows ’99-00 Models. 11-182...
Page 492: Dtc Troubleshooting
DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0505: Malfunction in Idle Control 7. Put your fingers on the lower port (A) in the throttle System body. NOTE: If DTC P1519 is stored at same time as DTC P0505, troubleshoot DTC P1519 first, then recheck for DTC P0505.
Page 493 Idle Control System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1519 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: IAC Valve 8. Check for continuity between body ground and IAC Circuit Malfunction valve 3P connector terminal No. 1. IAC VALVE 3P CONNECTOR 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 2.
Page 494 11. Connect IAC valve 3P connector terminal No. 3 to 15. Measure voltage between body ground and PCM body ground with a jumper wire. connector terminal B23. PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) IAC VALVE 3P CONNECTOR IACV (BLK/RED) (’99-00 models: IACV (BLK/RED) IACV (BLK/BLU)) JUMPER WIRE (’99-00 models:...
Page 495 Idle Control System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1519 ’01 Model: IAC Valve Circuit 8. Check for continuity between body ground and IAC Malfunction valve 3P connector terminal No. 1. IAC VALVE 3P CONNECTOR 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 2.
Page 496 11. Connect IAC valve 3P connector terminal No. 3 to 15. Measure voltage between body ground and PCM body ground with a jumper wire. connector terminal B23. IAC VALVE 3P CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR B (24P) IACV (BLK/RED) IACV (BLK/BLU) JUMPER WIRE Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals 12.
Page 497 Idle Control System A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting ’99-00, ’02-04 Models 8. Momentarily connect PCM connector terminals A17 and B20 with a jumper wire several times. NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies PCM CONNECTORS to ’02-04 models. A (32P) 1.
Page 498 14. Check for continuity between body ground and 16. Measure voltage between PCM connector PCM connector terminal A27. terminals A27 and B20. PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) PCM CONNECTORS A (32P) ACS (BLU/BLK) B (25P) ACS (BLU/RED) LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG1 (BRN/YEL)* Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
Page 499: A/C Signal Circuit
Idle Control System A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) ’01 Model 8. Momentarily connect PCM connector terminals A26 and E12 with a jumper wire several times. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM CONNECTORS A (31P) 2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 3.
Page 500 14. Check for continuity between body ground and 16. Measure voltage between PCM connector PCM connector terminal E21. terminals A26 and E21. PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) A (31P) (BLU/RED) LG1 (BRN/BLK) E (31P) Wire side of female terminals (BLU/RED) Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
Page 501: Alternator Fr Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
Idle Control System Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting ’99-00, ’02-04 Models 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P). NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies 10. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. to ’02-04 models. 11. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 4 to 1.
Page 502 ’01 Model 15. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM connector terminal C5. 1. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). ALTF (WHT/RED) 3. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminals A19 and A26. PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) ALTF (WHT/RED) Wire side of female terminals...
Page 503 Idle Control System Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 11. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 4 to 15. Check for continuity between body ground and body ground with a jumper wire. PCM connector terminal A19. ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) ALTF (WHT/RED) ALTF (WHT/RED) JUMPER WIRE...
Page 504: Starter Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
Starter Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting ’99-00, ’02-04 Models ’01 Model NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies 1. Shift the transmission in P or N position. to ’02-04 models. 2. Measure voltage between PCM connector 1. Shift the transmission in P or N. terminals A26 and E8 with the ignition switch in the START position (III).
Page 505: Psp Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
Idle Control System PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting ’99-00, ’02-04 Models 9. At the harness side, connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies wire. to ’02-04 models.
Page 506 ’01 Model 16. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminals A26 and B20. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM CONNECTORS 2. Measure voltage between PCM connector A (32P) terminals A26 and E20. PCM CONNECTORS A (31P) PSPSW (GRN) B (25P) LG1 (BRN/BLK) PSPSW(GRN) E (31P)
Page 507 Idle Control System PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 9. At the harness side, connect PSP switch 2P 16. Measure voltage between PCM connector connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper terminals A26 and E20. wire. PCM CONNECTORS A (31P) PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR PSPSW (GRN)
Page 508: Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting ’99-00, ’02-04 Models 4. Inspect the STOP (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ relay box. NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models. Is the f use OK ? 1.
Page 509 Idle Control System Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) ’01 Model 4. Inspect the STOP (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ relay box. 1. Check the brake lights. Is the f use OK ? Are the brake lights on without pressing the brake pedal? Repair open in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the STOP (20A) fuse.
Page 510: Idle Speed Adjustment
Idle Speed Adjustment Adjust the idle speed using the HDS procedure, if 5. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the possible. If not, use the following procedure: idle adjusting screw (A) 1/4-turn clockwise or counterclockwise. NOTE: • Leave the IAC valve connected. NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more •...
Page 511: Pcm Idle Learn Procedure
Idle Control System PCM Idle Learn Procedure For the PCM to learn the engine idle characteristics, this procedure must be done. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: • Disconnect the battery. • Replace the PCM. •...
Page 512: Component Location Index
Fuel Supply System Component Location Index ’99-00 models FUEL VAPOR LINE FUEL PUMP Test, page 11-218 Replacement, page 11-230 FUEL FEED LINE FUEL FILTER Replacement, page 11-229 FUEL RETURN LINE FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT Test/Replacement, page 11-234 FUEL FILL CAP FUEL TANK Replacement, page 11-231 FUEL RAIL...
Page 513 Fuel Supply System Component Location Index (cont’d) ’02-04 models FUEL PUMP FUEL VAPOR LINE Test, page 11-218 FUEL FEED LINE Replacement, page 11-230 FUEL FILTER Replacement, page 11-229 FUEL RETURN LINE FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT Test/Replacement, page 11-234 FUEL FILL CAP FUEL TANK Replacement, page 11-232 FUEL RAIL...
Page 514: Dtc Troubleshooting
DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0461 ‘03-04 Models: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Range/ Performance Problem NOTE: Because it requires 174 miles (280 km) of driving without refueling before completing this diagnosis, this DTC cannot be duplicated during troubleshooting. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank (see page 11-232).
Page 515 Fuel Supply System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0462 ‘03-04 Models: Fuel Level 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage 8. Measure voltage between PCM connector E15 and body ground. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). PCM CONNECTOR E (20P) 2.
Page 516 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal E15 and body ground. 11. Disconnect the PCM connector E (20P). PCM CONNECTOR E (20P) 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Measure voltage between gauge assembly 16P connector terminal No.
Page 517 Fuel Supply System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0463 ‘03-04 Models: Fuel Level 7. Check for continuity between body ground and fuel Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit tank unit 5P connector terminal No. 1. High Voltage FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR 1.
Page 518: Pgm-Fi Main Relay Circuit Troubleshooting
PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit Troubleshooting ’99-00, ’02-04 Models 5. Check for a blown ACG S (15A) fuse in the under- hood fuse/relay box. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is the f use blown? 2. Disconnect the PGM-FI main relay 7P connector. Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI 3.
Page 519 Fuel Supply System PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Shift to Park, then turn the ignition switch to the 12. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 7P START (III) position, and measure voltage between connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector body ground and PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal A15.
Page 520 15. Measure voltage between PCM connector 19. Connect battery power to PGM-FI main relay 7P terminals B1 and B2, and between B9 and B2. connector terminal No. 2, and connect PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No. 1 to ground. PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) Then check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminals No.
Page 521 Fuel Supply System PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) ’01 Model 5. Check for a blown ACG S (15A) fuse in the under- hood fuse/relay box. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is the f use blown? 2. Disconnect the PGM-FI main relay 7P connector. Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI 3.
Page 522 8. Shift to Park, then turn the ignition switch to the 12. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 7P START (III) position, and measure voltage between connector terminal No. 1 and the PCM connector body ground and PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal E1.
Page 523 Fuel Supply System PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then ON (II) again. 19. Connect battery power to PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No. 2, and connect PGM-FI 17. Measure voltage between PCM connector main relay 7P connector terminal No.
Page 524: Fuel Pressure Relieving
Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by loosening the fuel pulsation damper on top of the fuel rail. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio’s preset buttons.
Page 525: Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel Supply System Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required 8. Attach the fuel pressure gauge. • Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A • Fuel pressure gauge attachment 07VAJ-0040100 ’99-01 models 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 07406-004000A radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio’s preset buttons.
Page 526 12. ’99-01 models: 16. ’02-04 models: Read the pressure gauge (with the fuel pressure Read the pressure gauge. The pressure should be regulator vacuum hose disconnected and clamped). 290 330 kPa (2.9 3.4 kgf/cm , 42 48 psi). The pressure should be 300 340 kPa (3.0 3.5 kgf/cm , 43 49 psi).
Page 527: Fuel Pump Test
Fuel Supply System Fuel Pump Test If you suspect a problem with the fuel pump, check that 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). the fuel pump actually runs; when it is on, you will hear fuel flow if you listen to the injector rails underneath the 6.
Page 528: Fuel Line Inspection
Fuel Line Inspection Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts. ’99-00 models 37 N·m (3.8 kgf·m, 27 lbf·ft) 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft) ’01 model 37 N·m (3.8 kgf·m, 27 lbf·ft) 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft) (cont’d) 11-219...
Page 529 Fuel Supply System Fuel Line Inspection (cont’d) ’02-04 models: 37 N·m (3.8 kgf·m, 27 lbf·ft) 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft) 11-220...
Page 530 ’99-00 models Check all hose clamps, and retighten if necessary. : Do not disconnect the hose from the line at these joints. FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Clamp in the middle. 10 15 mm Clamp in the middle. (0.39 0.59 in.) (cont’d) 11-221...
Page 531 Fuel Supply System Fuel Line Inspection (cont’d) ’01-04 models Check all hose clamps, and retighten if necessary. : Do not disconnect the hose from the line at these joints. FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE Clamp in the middle. 10 15 mm Clamp in the middle.
Page 532 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precaution The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly connects MANUFACTURER TUBE RETAINER TUBE the in-tank fuel pump to the fuel feed line and the fuel COLOR COLOR return line. When removing or installing the fuel pump SANOH BLACK WHITE FEED TUBE and fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect (BOTH SIDES)
Page 533 Fuel Supply System Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 7. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt and radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then damage. write down the frequencies for the radio’s preset buttons.
Page 534 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation 1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt and 3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect damage, and clean if necessary. fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from the mating line. 2.
Page 535 Fuel Supply System Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont’d) 4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A), 5. Make sure the connection is secure and that the and align the retainer (B) locking pawls with the pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually connector (C) grooves.
Page 536: Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement ’99-01 models 7. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A) counterclockwise to set the angle as shown. 1. Remove the intake manifold cover and intake manifold (see page 9-4). 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure regulator, then relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-215).
Page 537 Fuel Supply System Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement (cont’d) ’02-04 models 6. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A) counterclockwise to set the angle as shown. 1. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure regulator, then relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-215). 2.
Page 538: Fuel Filter Replacement
Fuel Filter Replacement The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal pressure drops below the specified value with a new base gasket (E). When installing the fuel (see page 11-216) after making sure that the fuel pump tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel and the fuel pressure regulator are OK.
Page 539: Fuel Pump Replacement
Fuel Supply System Fuel Pump Replacement Special Tools Required 8. Remove the bracket (A), the fuel filter (B), the fuel Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), and the wire harness (E). 1. Remove the second row seats and carpet (see page 20-65).
Page 540: Fuel Tank Replacement
Fuel Tank Replacement ’99-00 Models 1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-215). 2. Jack up the vehicle, and support it with jackstands. 3. Drain the fuel tank: Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-230). Using a hand pump, hose, and container suitable for gasoline, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
Page 541 Fuel Supply System Fuel Tank Replacement (cont’d) ’01-04 Models 1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-215). 2. Jack up the vehicle, and support it with jackstands. 3. Drain the fuel tank unit: Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-230). Using a hand pump, hose and container suitable for gasoline, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
Page 542: Fuel Gauge Test
Fuel Gauge Test NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer 8. Measure voltage between gauge assembly 16P to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-96). connector terminal No. 11 and body ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be 1.
Page 543: Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test/Replacement
Fuel Supply System Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test/Replacement Special Tools Required 10. Before you install the fuel tank unit, check these Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A items: 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. • When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (A) 2.
Page 544 Low Fuel Indicator Test 1. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page 11-234). • If the system is OK, go to step 2. • If the system has any malfunction, repair it. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with the float at the E (EMPTY) position.
Page 545: Component Location Index
Intake Air System Component Location Index ’99-01 models: THROTTLE CABLE Adjustment, page 11-242 AIR CLEANER Replacement, page 11-240 AIR CLEANER HOUSING Disassembly, page 11-241 AIR VALVE Test, page 11-239 THROTTLE BODY (TB) Test, page 11-237 Cleaning, page 11-237 INTAKE AIR BYPASS CONTROL THERMAL VALVE Removal/Installation, page 11-243 Test, page 11-238 Disassembly/Reassembly, page 11-245...
Page 546: Throttle Body Test
Throttle Body Test Throttle Body Cleaning NOTE: 1. Check for damage to the air cleaner. • Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. It is preset at the factory. 2. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-243). • If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes 3.
Page 547: Intake Air Bypass Control Thermal Valve Test
Intake Air System Intake Air Bypass Control Thermal Valve Test Special Tools Required 5. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure Vacuum pump gauge, 0 30 in.Hg the vacuum gauge reading does not change as the A973X-041-XXXXX rpm changes. 1.
Page 548: Heated Air Induction System Test
Heated Air Induction System Test 1. Remove the air cleaner housing cover and air 4. Check the air valve (A). The air valve should be cleaner element. closed when the temperature at the wax element (B) is above 50°F (10°C). 2.
Page 549: Air Cleaner Element Replacement
Intake Air System Air Cleaner Element Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio’s preset buttons. 2. Remove the cable clamp (A) from the air cleaner housing cover (B). 3.
Page 550: Air Cleaner Housing Disassembly/Reassembly
Air Cleaner Housing Disassembly/Reassembly 1. Drain the coolant (see page 10-13). 2.9 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2.2 lbf·ft) 2.9 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2.2 lbf·ft) 2. Remove the air cleaner housing. 3. Remove the cover (A) and the radiator (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 4.
Page 551: Throttle Cable Adjustment
Intake Air System Throttle Cable Adjustment 1. Hold the throttle link (A) to the throttle lever (B). There should be no clearance. 2. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable free play (A) should be 10 12 mm (3/8 1/2 in.). 3.
Page 552: Throttle Body Removal/Installation
Throttle Body Removal/Installation NOTE: • Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. • After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable (see page 4-52), and the throttle cable (see page 11-242). • The TP sensor is not removable. ’99-00 models MAP SENSOR THROTTLE CABLE SPACER CRUISE CONTROL CABLE...
Page 553 Intake Air System Throttle Body Removal/Installation (cont’d) ’02-04 models GASKET Replace. THROTTLE CABLE MAP SENSOR CRUISE CONTROL CABLE 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) SPACER TP SENSOR 11-244...
Page 554: Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly
Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly ’99 model ’01 model 2.1 N·m (0.21 kgf·m, 1.5 lbf·ft) 2.1 N·m (0.21 kgf·m, 1.5 lbf·ft) MAP SENSOR MAP SENSOR O-RING O-RING Replace. Replace. SPACER O-RING O-RING IDLE ADJUSTING SCREW TP SENSOR IDLE ADJUSTING TP SENSOR SCREW IAC VALVE O-RING IAC VALVE...
Page 555: Catalytic Converter System
Catalytic Converter System DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0420: Catalytic System Efficiency Below Threshold NOTE: • If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the same time as DTC P0420, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0420. • Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models.
Page 556: Egr System
EGR System DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0401: EGR System Insufficient Flow DTC P1491 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: Valve Insufficient Lift 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies 2. Test-drive under these conditions: to ’02-04 models. •...
Page 557 EGR System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector 12. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminals No. 4 and No. 6. terminals C18 and C28. EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTORS C (31P) SG2 (GRN/BLK) SG2 (GRN/YEL)* EGR (PNK) GND (BLK) EGR (BLU/RED)*...
Page 558 15. Measure resistance between EGR valve 6P 20. Check for continuity between PCM connector connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. terminal C6 and body ground. EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) EGRP (WHT/BLK) VCC2 EGRP Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of male terminals Is there continuity? Is there 100 k...
Page 559 EGR System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 25. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 29. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B7 and body ground. 26. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P). PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) 27. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B7 and body ground.
Page 560 DTC P1491 ’01 Model: EGR Valve 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Insufficient Lift 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 11. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with terminals No.
Page 561 EGR System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminals A16 and A28. 14. At the sensor side, measure resistance between EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR EGRP EGRP...
Page 562 23. Connect the battery positive terminal to EGR valve 28. Connect EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 4 to 6P connector terminal No. 4 with a jumper wire. body ground with a jumper wire. EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR JUMPER WIRE (PNK) Terminal side of male terminals...
Page 563 EGR System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 30. Disconnect the jumper wire from the EGR valve 6P connector. 31. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground. EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR GND (BLK) Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity? Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck (see page 11-5).
Page 564 DTC P1498 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 7. Measure voltage between the PCM connector Valve Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage terminals C18 and C28. NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies PCM CONNECTORS C (31P) to ’02-04 models. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). SG2 (GRN/BLK) SG2 (GRN/YEL)* 2.
Page 565 EGR System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1498 ’01 Model: EGR Valve Position 7. Measure voltage between PCM connector Sensor Circuit High Voltage terminals A28 and A30. 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) 2. Start the engine. Is DT C P1498 indicated? Go to step 3.
Page 566: Pcv System
PCV System PCV Valve Inspection and Test 1. Remove the intake manifold cover and the rear 3. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the ignition coil cover (see page 9-4). PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your 2.
Page 567: Evap System
EVAP System Component Location Index ’99-00 models EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Troubleshooting, step 3 on page 11-269, step 1 on page 11-282 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE Troubleshooting, step 11 on page 11-270, step 10 on page 11-283 FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Troubleshooting, page 11-261...
Page 568 ’01 model EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Troubleshooting, step 3 on page 11-274, step 1 on page 11-287 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE Troubleshooting, step 11 on page 11-274, step 11 on page 11-288 FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Troubleshooting, page 11-262 FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE...
Page 569 EVAP System Component Location Index (cont’d) ’02-04 models EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Troubleshooting, step 3 on page 11-278, step 1 on page 11-292 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE Troubleshooting, step 11 on page 11-279, step 10 on page 11-293 FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Troubleshooting,...
Page 570: Dtc Troubleshooting
DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0451 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 6. Connect a vacuum pump to the open end of the Sensor Range/Performance Problem hose. Special Tools Required Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX A973X-041-XXXXX NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models.
Page 571 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0451 ’01 Model: FTP Sensor Range/ 6. Connect a vacuum pump to the open end of the Performance Problem hose. Special Tools Required Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX A973X-041-XXXXX 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2.
Page 572 DTC P0452 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap. NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models. 8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector. 1.
Page 573 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0452 ’01 Model: FTP Sensor Circuit 11. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector Low Voltage terminals No. 2 and No. 3. FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 1. Check the vacuum lines at the FTP sensor for misrouting, leakage, breakage, and clogging.
Page 574 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3. 7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap. FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). FTP (LT GRN) 10.
Page 575 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0453 ’99-00, ’02-04 Models: 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap. NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies to ’02-04 models. 8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector. 1.
Page 576 DTC P0453 ’01 Model: FTP Sensor Circuit 11. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector High Voltage terminals No. 2 and No. 3. FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 1. Check the vacuum lines of the FTP sensor for misrouting, leakage, breakage, and clogging. Are the vacuum lines OK ? FTP (LT GRN) Go to step 2.
Page 577 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3. 7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap. FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector. 9.
Page 578 DTC P1456 ’99-00 Models: EVAP Control 2. Check the fuel fill cap seal. System Leakage (fuel tank system) Is the f uel f ill cap seal missing or damaged? The fuel system is designed to allow specified Replace the fuel fill cap (gray or black maximum vacuum and pressure conditions.
Page 579 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Check for continuity between EVAP purge control EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Test solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. 11. Disconnect both vacuum hoses from the EVAP two way valve (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the EVAP PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID canister port on the two way valve.
Page 580 Is there battery voltage? 17. Check for continuity between EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Replace the EVAP bypass solenoid valve (A) and the O-rings (B). EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR Repair open in the wire between the EVAP bypass solenoid valve and No.
Page 581 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Test 22. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP canister filter (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the hose. Is there continuity? Go to step 28. A973X-041-XXXXX Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A) 23.
Page 582 DTC P1456 ’01 Model: EVAP Control System Vacuum Hoses and Connections Test Leakage (fuel tank system) 30. Tighten the fuel cap 3 ‘‘clicks’’, then monitor the fuel tank pressure readings with the HDS. The fuel system is designed to allow specified 31.
Page 583 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 2. Check the fuel fill cap seal. 8. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Is the f uel f ill cap seal missing or damaged? EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE Replace the fuel fill cap (gray or black colored cap).
Page 584 EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Test 17. Check for continuity continuity between EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 11. Disconnect both vacuum hoses from the EVAP two and body ground. way valve (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR canister port on the two way valve.
Page 585 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 20. Plug the upper port (A) of the EVAP two way valve. 24. Apply vacuum to the hose with 5 strokes of the pump. Does the valve hold vacuum? Go to step 25. The EVAP canister vent shut valve is OK. Go to step 30.
Page 586 28. Disconnect PCM connector E (31P). Vacuum Hoses and Connections Test 29. Check for continuity between EVAP canister vent 30. Do the fuel tank vapor control valve test (see page shut valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body 11-298). ground.
Page 587 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1456 ’02-04 Models: EVAP Control 2. Check the fuel fill cap seal. System Leakage (fuel tank system) Is the f uel f ill cap seal missing or damaged? The fuel system is designed to allow specified Replace the fuel fill cap (gray or black maximum vacuum and pressure conditions.
Page 588 8. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Test valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. 11. Disconnect both vacuum hoses from the EVAP two EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE way valve (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the canister port on the two way valve.
Page 589 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) Is there battery voltage? 17. Check for continuity continuity between EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Replace the EVAP bypass solenoid valve (A) and the O-rings (B). EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR Repair open in the wire between the EVAP bypass solenoid valve and No.
Page 590 EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Test 22. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP canister filter (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the hose. Is there continuity? Go to step 28. A973X-041-XXXXX Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A) 23.
Page 591 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1457 ’99-00 Models: EVAP Control Vacuum Hoses and Connections Test System Leakage (EVAP canister system) 30. Do the fuel tank vapor control valve test (see page 11-298). The fuel system is designed to allow specified Is the f uel tank vapor control valve OK ? maximum vacuum and pressure conditions.
Page 592 Is there continuity? 2. Turn the EVAP purge control solenoid valve on with the HDS, or connect PCM connector terminal A6 to body ground with a jumper wire. Go to step 8. PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Repair open in the wire between the EVAP purge control solenoid valve and the PCM (A6).
Page 593 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). 12. Apply vacuum to the hose. 17. Check for continuity between EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and Does the valve hold vacuum? body ground.
Page 594 Is there continuity? 19. Turn the EVAP canister vent shut valve on with the HDS, or connect PCM connector terminal A4 to body ground with a jumper wire. Go to step 25. Repair open in the wire between the EVAP PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) canister vent shut valve and PCM (A4).
Page 595 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) Canister System Leak Test 33. Check the voltage for 20 seconds. 27. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold f or at least 20 seconds? 28. Connect 2 three-way T-fittings (A) into the hose from the EVAP canister to the EVAP two way valve.
Page 596 DTC P1457 ’01 Model: EVAP Control System 2. Turn the EVAP canister purge valve on with the Leakage (EVAP canister system) HDS, or connect PCM connector terminal E11 to body ground with a jumper wire. The fuel system is designed to allow specified PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) maximum vacuum and pressure conditions.
Page 597 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge 12. Apply vacuum to the hose. valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Does the valve hold vacuum? EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR...
Page 598 16. Disconnect PCM connector E (31P). 19. Turn the EVAP canister vent shut valve on with the HDS, or connect PCM connector terminal E22 to 17. Check for continuity between EVAP bypass body ground with a jumper wire. solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Page 599 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Canister System Leak Test 26. Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut 27. Turn the ignition switch OFF. valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. 28. Connect 2 three-way T-fittings (A) into the hose EVAP CANISTER VENT from the EVAP canister to the EVAP two way valve.
Page 600 33. Monitor the voltage for 20 seconds. 40. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold f or at 41. Disconnect the purge line hose (A) from the least 20 seconds? canister at the metal line, and plug the hose (B). Inspect the EVAP canister vent shut valve line and connections.
Page 601 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1457 ’02-04 Models: EVAP Control 2. Turn the EVAP canister purge valve on with the System Leakage (EVAP canister system) HDS, or connect PCM connector terminal A6 to body ground with a jumper wire. PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) The fuel system is designed to allow specified maximum vacuum and pressure conditions.
Page 602 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 12. Apply vacuum to the hose. 9. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge Does the valve hold vacuum? valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. EVAP bypass solenoid valve/EVAP two way EVAP CANISTER PURGE valve is OK.
Page 603 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 16. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). 19. Turn the EVAP canister vent shut valve on with the HDS, or connect PCM connector terminal A4 to 17. Check for continuity between EVAP bypass body ground with a jumper wire. solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.
Page 604 25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Canister System Leak Test 26. Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut 27. Turn the ignition switch OFF. valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. 28. Connect 2 three-way T-fittings (A) into the hose EVAP CANISTER VENT from the EVAP canister to the EVAP two way valve.
Page 605 EVAP System DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 33. Monitor the voltage for 20 seconds. 40. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold f or at 41. Disconnect the purge line hose (A) from the least 20 seconds? canister at the metal line, and plug the hose (B).
Page 606: Evap Two Way Valve Test
EVAP Two Way Valve Test Special Tools Required 5. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the • Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX gauge. The pressure should stabilize momentarily • Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0 4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B above 1.0 kPa (0.3 in.Hg, 8 mm Hg). 1.
Page 607: Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Test
EVAP System Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Test Special Tools Required 5. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the tube. ’01-04 models Float Test A973X-041- XXXXX 1.
Page 608 Valve Test 5. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor signal tube (A). 1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the bolts and fuel tank vapor control valve cover (A). 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
Page 609 EVAP System Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Test (cont’d) 9. Connect a second vacuum pump to the fuel tank 11. Fill the fuel tank with fuel, then check for fuel in the vapor signal tube (A). EVAP two way valve (A) and fuel tank vapor recirculation hose (B).
Page 610: Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Replacement
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Replacement ’01-04 models 3. Remove the fuel tank vapor control valve (A). 1. Remove the fuel tank vapor control valve cover (A). 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 4. Install the fuel tank vapor control valve in the reverse order of removal.
Page 611 SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and should be done only by an authorized Honda dealer. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
Page 612 03/07/29 09:29:07 61S0X050_140_0002 Transaxle 4-speed Automatic Transmission ....... 14-1 5-speed Automatic Transmission ....... 14-245 Driveline/Axle ....................16-1...
Page 613 03/07/29 09:29:07 61S0X050_140_0003...
Page 614 03/07/29 09:29:09 61S0X050_140_0004 4-speed Automatic Transmission (1999-2001 Models) Automatic Transmission Transmission End Cover Special Tools ..................... 14-2 End Cover and Idler Gear Removal ......14-188 * General Troubleshooting Information ....14-3 Park Lever Stop Inspection and DTC Troubleshooting Index ......
Page 615 03/07/29 09:29:12 61S0X050_140_0005 Automatic Transmission Special Tools Ref. No. Tool Number Description 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 Mainshaft Holder 07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG40100 Seal Driver Attachment 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 07HAC-PK40102 Housing Puller 07HAD-SF10100 Driver Attachment 07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 07LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAE-PX40100...
Page 616: General Troubleshooting Information
5. Clear the DTC and data. the steering column lower cover) is connected to the Scan Tool or Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), it will NOTE: You can also reset the memory by removing indicate the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) when the the No.
Page 617: Automatic Transmission
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user’s assembly (B) will usually blink. manual for specific instructions.) 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select Honda System, and then SCS mode, then observe the D4 indicator in the gauge assembly.
Page 618 How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM Clear A/T DTCs, and PCM Reset Procedures Special Tools Required 1. Connect the Scan Tool or the HDS to the DLC. Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required) 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1.
Page 619 Automatic Transmission General Troubleshooting Information (cont’d) How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect the Scan Tool or the HDS to the DLC. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4.
Page 620: Dtc Troubleshooting Index
DTC Troubleshooting Index 1999-2000 Models NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot. D4 Indicator Detection Item Page P0715 (15) Blinks Mainshaft speed sensor (see page 14-70) P0720 (9) Blinks Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-72) P0730 (41) Shift control system...
Page 621 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) 2001 Model NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot. D4 Indicator Detection Item Page P0715 (15) Blinks Mainshaft speed sensor (see page 14-96) P0720 (9) Blinks Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-98)
Page 622: Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Troubleshooting Index These symptoms DO NOT trigger diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) or cause the D4 indicator to blink. If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) was reported ON or the D4 indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. But if the vehicle has one of the symptoms in the following chart, check the probable cause(s) for it, in the sequence listed, until you find the problem.
Page 623 Automatic Transmission Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Vehicle moves in 1st accumulator • Inspect 1st clutch pressure. 2 and R, but not defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch assembly for in D4, D3, or 1 1st gears worn or wear and damage.
Page 624 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Poor acceleration; Low ATF level • Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler lines for flares on starting Shift cable broken or out leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush the off in D4 and D3; of adjustment ATF cooler lines.
Page 625 Automatic Transmission Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Poor acceleration; Torque converter clutch Check for a stuck lock-up valve in the valve body. stall speed low solenoid valve defective Engine output low Lock-up clutch piston defective Lock-up shift valve defective Engine idle Low ATF level...
Page 626 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Late shift after Shift solenoid valve C • Check the D4 indicator, and check for loose connectors. shifting from N to defective Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve D4 and D3, or A/T clutch pressure for seizure.
Page 627 Automatic Transmission Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes The A/T does not Modulator valve defective. Check the line pressure. shift Erratic shifting; Shift solenoid valve A • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve Fails to shift in D4; defective for seizure.
Page 628 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Excessive shock, Shift solenoid valve C • Check the D4 indicator, and check for loose connectors. or flares on 2-3 defective Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve upshift or 3-2 3rd clutch pressure for seizure.
Page 629 Automatic Transmission Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Vibration in all Drive plate defective or • Check for a missinstalled/damaged drive plate. shift lever transmission misassembled • Set the idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If it positions doesn’t fix the problem, adjust the engine mounts.
Page 630 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Torque converter Torque converter clutch • Check the D4 indicator, and check for loose connectors. clutch does not solenoid valve defective Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve operate smoothly A/T clutch pressure body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. control solenoid valves If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck, A and B defective...
Page 631: System Description
Automatic Transmission System Description General Operation The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled unit which provides 4 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the engine. Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit.
Page 632 Gear Selection The shift lever has seven positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D4: 1st through 4th gear ranges, D3: 1st through 3rd gear ranges, 2: 2nd gear, and 1: 1st gear. Position Description P: PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All clutches are released.
Page 633 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Clutches The 4-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don’t slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear.
Page 634 Transmission Cutaway View MAINSHAFT 4TH CLUTCH ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR 4TH GEAR MAINSHAFT 3RD CLUTCH REVERSE GEAR RING GEAR MAINSHAFT IDLER GEAR MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR TORQUE CONVERTER PITOT FLANGE LUBRICATION PITOT PIPE LOCK-UP CLUTCH PISTON MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE GEAR PITOT PIPE COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR COUNTERSHAFT...
Page 635 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Power Flow POSITION PART TORQUE 1ST GEAR 2ND GEAR 3RD GEAR REVERSE PARK CONVERTER 1ST CLUTCH GEAR CLUTCH GEAR GEAR CLUTCH CLUTCH :Operates :Doesn’t operate Gear Operation Gears on the mainshaft: • The 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 3rd clutch. •...
Page 636 P Position Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear. N Position Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the countershaft idler gear, and the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
Page 637 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Power Flow (cont’d) In the D4 or D3 position, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears, according to conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed. D4 or D3 Position in 1st gear and the 1 Position •...
Page 638 D4 or D3 Position in 2nd gear and the 2 Position • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the secondary shaft. • The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear. •...
Page 639 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Power Flow (cont’d) D4 or D3 Position in 3rd gear • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear with the mainshaft. • The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft. •...
Page 640 D4 Position in 4th gear • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 4th gear while the shift lever is in the forward range (D4, D3, 2, and 1 position). • Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the mainshaft.
Page 641 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Power Flow (cont’d) R Position • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft (reverse gear while the shift lever is in the R position). • Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the mainshaft.
Page 642 Electronic Control System Functional Diagram The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves. Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located below the dashboard, under the front lower panel behind the center console. Throttle Position Sensor Data Link Connector Signal...
Page 643 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) Electronic Controls Location SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID PARK PIN SWITCH POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER’S A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH VALVE B COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID...
Page 644 Shift Control Shifting is related to engine torque through the solenoid valves, which are controlled by the PCM. The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors, and actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, and C to control shifting. Also, a grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in the D4 and D3 positions while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed.
Page 645 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) Grade Logic Control System How it works: The PCM compares actual driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input from the countershaft speed sensor, the throttle position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, and the shift lever position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed.
Page 646 Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in the D4 and D3 positions, the system extends the engagement area of 2nd gear and 3rd gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power when needed.
Page 647 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) PCM Electrical Connections (1999-2000 models) IGNITION SWITCH VB SOL LS AP BATTERY A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A PGM FI LS AM MAIN RELAY LS BP IGP1 A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B IGP2...
Page 648 PCM Electrical Connections (2001 model) IGNITION SWITCH LS AP VB SOL BATTERY A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A PGM FI LS AM MAIN RELAY LS BP IGP1 A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B IGP2 LS BM BRAKE PEDAL SH A POSITION SWITCH SHIFT SOLENOID...
Page 649 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs (1999-2000 models) The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions for the A/T control system are shown. PCM Connector Terminal Locations A (32P) C (31P) D (16P) B (25P) PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Terminal Wire color...
Page 650 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) Terminal Wire color Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage Number YEL/BLK IGP1 Power supply circuit from With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage main relay With ignition switch OFF: 0 V Ground Less than 1.0 V at all times LS AM A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A power...
Page 651 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs (1999-2000 models) PCM Connector Terminal Locations C (31P) D (16P) A (32P) B (25P) PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) Terminal Wire color Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage Number Not used BLK/YEL VB SOL...
Page 652 PCM Inputs and Outputs (2001 model) The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions for the A/T control system are shown. PCM Connector Terminal Locations A (31P) B (24P) C (22P) D (17P) E (31P) PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Terminal Wire color Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage...
Page 653 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs (2001 model) PCM Connector Terminal Locations B (24P) C (22P) D (17P) E (31P) A (31P) PCM CONNECTOR C (22P) Terminal Wire color Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage Number LS AM A/T clutch pressure control...
Page 654 PCM CONNECTOR C (22P) Terminal Wire color Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage Number Torque converter clutch During lock-up condition: Battery voltage solenoid valve control During no lock-up condition: 0 V BLU/BLK OP2SW A/T 2nd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage switch signal input (No 2nd clutch pressure) ATP 2...
Page 655 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs (2001 model) PCM Connector Terminal Locations B (24P) C (22P) D (17P) E (31P) A (31P) PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) Terminal Wire color Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage Number GRN/BLK D4 IND...
Page 656 Hydraulic Controls The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body and the accumulator body. The ATF pump is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve, directing pressure to each of the clutches.
Page 657 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Controls (cont’d) Main Valve Body The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve E, the servo control valve, the cooler check valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, and the ATF pump gears.
Page 658 Regulator Valve The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through B and B’. Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and the relief valve.
Page 659 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Controls (cont’d) Servo Body The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, the CPC valves A and B, and the 3rd and the 4th accumulators. CPC VALVE A SERVO BODY CPC VALVE B...
Page 660 Hydraulic Flow Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure that’s regulated by the regulator valve.
Page 661 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) N Position The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valve and positions of the shift valve are as follows: • The shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A moves to the left side. •...
Page 662 D4 Position: 1st gear shifting from the N position The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves A and C ON when shifting to the D4 position from N. Shift solenoid valve B keeps ON. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of the shift valve C is released, then the shift valve C is moved to the right side.
Page 663 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) D4 Position: Driving in 1st gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, but shift solenoid valves B and C keep ON. SH A pressure (SA) is applied to the left side of shift valve A, then shift valve A is moved to the left side. This movement switches the port of line pressure and CPC pressure on shift valve A.
Page 664 D4 Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. Shift solenoid valves B and C keep ON. Then shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the left side of the shift valve A is released.
Page 665 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) D4 Position: Driving in 2nd gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B keep ON. Releasing LS A pressure in the CPC valve A releases CPC A pressure in the 1st clutch pressure circuit.
Page 666 D4 Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A keeps ON, and C keeps OFF.
Page 667 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) D4 Position: Driving in 3rd gear The PCM turns the shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release LS B pressure (57). Shift solenoid valve A keeps ON, and B keeps OFF. Releasing LS B pressure in the CPC valve B releases CPC B pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit.
Page 668 D4 Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valve B keeps OFF, and C keeps ON.
Page 669 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) D4 Position: Driving in 4th gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B keep OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) releases CPC A pressure in the 3rd clutch pressure circuit.
Page 670 2 Position The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as follows: • Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and the shift valve A stays on the right side. •...
Page 671 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) 1 Position The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift control solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as follows: •...
Page 672 R Position: Shifting to the R position from the P or N position Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3) is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes line pressure (3’). Line pressure (3’) pushes the servo valve to the reverse position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the manual valve.
Page 673 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) R Position: Driving in reverse gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure.
Page 674 P Position Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the servo valve.
Page 675 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Lock-up System The lock-up mechanism operates in D4 position (3rd and 4th), and D3 position (3rd). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover.
Page 676 No Lock-up The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA) on the left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter.
Page 677 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Lock-up System (cont’d) Partial Lock-up As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM to release LC pressure (LA) in the left side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to the left side to switch the port leading torque converter pressure to the left side and right side of the torque converter.
Page 678 Full Lock-up When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to increase LS A or LS B pressure (58). The LS A or LS B pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock- up timing valve, and moves them to the left side.
Page 679 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Circuit Diagram 1999-2000 Models UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BATTERY No.47 (20A) WHT/YEL No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) No.9 (10A) No.6 (15A) IGNITION SWITCH MULTIPLEX CONTROL No.1 (15A) UNIT (DRIVER’S) SHIFT LOCK DRIVER’S SOLENOID UNDER DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX No.54 (40A) No.46 (15A) ATP P...
Page 680 WHT/YEL WHT/YEL MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR SPEED SENSOR INTERLOCK ENGINE THROTTLE SWITCH BRAKE COOLANT POSITION SWITCH TEMPERATURE SENSOR SENSOR CRUISE INTERLOCK DATA LINK CONTROL ABS/TCS SOLENOID CONNECTOR UNIT UNIT WHT/RED STEERING LOCK ASSSEMBLY G401 PARK WHT/BLK BLU/GRN LT GRN RED/BLK RED/WHT SWITCH YEL/BLU...
Page 681 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Circuit Diagram 2001 Model UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BATTERY No.47 (20A) WHT/YEL No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) No.9 (10A) No.6 (15A) IGNITION SWITCH MULTIPLEX CONTROL No.1 (15A) UNIT (DRIVER’S) SHIFT LOCK DRIVER’S SOLENOID UNDER DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX No.54 (40A) No.46 (15A) ATP P...
Page 682 WHT/YEL WHT/YEL MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR SPEED SENSOR INTERLOCK BRAKE ENGINE THROTTLE SWITCH PEDAL COOLANT POSITION POSITION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SWITCH SENSOR INTERLOCK SOLENOID CRUISE DATA LINK CONTROL ABS/TCS CONNECTOR UNIT UNIT WHT/RED STEERING LOCK ASSSEMBLY G401 PARK WHT/BLK BLU/GRN LT GRN RED/BLK RED/WHT SWITCH...
Page 683: Dtc Troubleshooting
Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting 1999-2000 Models 4. Disconnect the D (16P) connector from the PCM. DTC P0715: Problem in Mainshaft Speed 5. Check for continuity between body ground and the Sensor Circuit D11 terminal and D12 terminal individually. PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 684 8. Disconnect the 2P connector from the mainshaft speed sensor. 9. Check for continuity between the D11 terminal and the No. 1 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor connector. PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) NM (RED) MAINSHAFT SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity? Go to step 10.
Page 685 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 1999-2000 Models 5. Check for continuity between body ground and the D10 terminal and D16 terminal individually. DTC P0720: Problem in Countershaft Speed PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) Sensor Circuit NC (BLU) NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 686 1999-2000 Models 6. Recheck for code P0730. DTC P0730: Problem in Shift Control System Does the scan tool or the HDS indicate code P07 30? NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General Replace the transmission. Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 687 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 1999-2000 Models 5. Using the scan tool, check to be sure that the DTC P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control engine coolant temperature is 176°F (80°C) or System above. NOTE: 6. Drive the vehicle under the same conditions as •...
Page 688 1999-2000 Models 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P0753: Problem in Shift Control Solenoid 6. Measure the resistance between the D7 and B20 or Valve A Circuit B22 terminals. PCM CONNECTORS NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General SH A (BLU/YEL) Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before B (25P)
Page 689 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Disconnect the 3P connector from the lock-up 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). control solenoid valve/shift control solenoid valve A assembly. 12. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or B22 terminals. 9.
Page 690 1999-2000 Models 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P0758: Problem in Shift Control Solenoid 6. Measure the resistance between the D2 and B20 or Valve B Circuit B22 terminals. PCM CONNECTORS NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General SH B (GRN/WHT) Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before B (25P)
Page 691 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Disconnect the 2P connector from the shift control 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). solenoid valve B. 12. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or 9. Check for continuity between the D2 and B20 or B22 terminals.
Page 692 1999-2000 Models 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P0763: Problem in Shift Control Solenoid 6. Measure the resistance between the D3 and B20 or Valve C Circuit B22 terminals. PCM CONNECTORS NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before SH C (GRN) you troubleshoot.
Page 693 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Disconnect the 2P connector from shift control 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). solenoid valve C. 12. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or 9. Check for continuity between the D3 and B20 or B22 terminals.
Page 694 1999-2000 Models Is there battery voltage? DTC P1705: Short in A/T Gear Position Switch Go to step 8. Circuit Check for a short in the wire between the D6 NOTE: terminal and the A/T gear position switch or A/T • Record all freeze data and review General gear position indicator, and check for an open in Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and...
Page 695 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 11. Measure the voltage between the D9 and B20 or 12. Shift to all positions other than D3. B22 terminals. 13. Measure the voltage between the D8 and B20 or PCM CONNECTORS B22 terminals. B (25P) D (16P) PCM CONNECTORS D (16P)
Page 696 14. Shift to all positions other than 2. 16. Shift to all positions other than 1. 15. Measure the voltage between the D14 and B20 or 17. Measure the voltage between the D15 and B20 or B22 terminals. B22 terminals. PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS B (25P)
Page 697 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 1999-2000 Models 5. Shift to D4 position. DTC P1706: Open in A/T Gear Position Switch 6. Measure the voltage between the D9 and B20 or Circuit B22 terminals. PCM CONNECTORS NOTE: B (25P) D (16P) •...
Page 698 9. Shift to P or N position. 13. Shift to 2 position. 10. Measure the voltage between the B14 and B20 or 14. Measure the voltage between the D14 and B20 or B22 terminals. B22 terminals. PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTORS B (25P) D (16P)
Page 699 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 1999-2000 Models 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P1738: Problem in 2nd Clutch Pressure 4. Disconnect the D (16P) connector from the PCM. Switch Circuit 5. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General connector.
Page 700 7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch securely supported. pressure switch connector terminal and body ground. 8. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE securely.
Page 701 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 1999-2000 Models 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P1739: Problem in 3rd Clutch Pressure 4. Disconnect the B (25P) connector from the PCM. Switch Circuit 5. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General connector.
Page 702 7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch securely supported. pressure switch connector terminal and body ground. 8. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE securely.
Page 703 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 1999-2000 Models 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P1753: Problem in Lock-up Control 6. Measure the resistance between the D1 and B20 or Solenoid Valve Circuit B22 terminals. NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General PCM CONNECTORS Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before LC (YEL)
Page 704 8. Disconnect the 3P connector from the lock-up 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). control solenoid valve/shift control solenoid valve A assembly. 12. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or B22 terminals. 9. Check for continuity between the D1 and B20 or PCM CONNECTORS B22 terminals.
Page 705 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 1999-2000 Models 3. Disconnect the B (25P) connector from the PCM. DTC P1768: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 4. Check for continuity between body ground and the Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit B8 terminal and the B17 terminal individually. PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) NOTE: •...
Page 706 7. Disconnect the D (16P) connector from the PCM. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22 terminals and body ground. 9. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) B22 terminals.
Page 707 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 1999-2000 Models 3. Disconnect the B (25P) connector from the PCM. DTC P1773: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 4. Check for continuity between body ground and the Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit B18 terminal and the B25 terminal individually. PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) NOTE: •...
Page 708 7. Disconnect the D (16P) connector from the PCM. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22 terminals and body ground individually. 9. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) B22 terminals.
Page 709: 2001 Model
Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 2001 Model 5. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C6 and body ground, and between DTC P0715: Problem in Mainshaft Speed terminal C7 and body ground. Sensor Circuit PCM CONNECTOR C (22P) NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 710 8. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector (2P). terminal C6 and the No. 2 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor connector. 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C7 and the No. 1 terminal of the mainshaft PCM CONNECTOR C (22P) speed sensor connector.
Page 711 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 2001 Model 5. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C14 and body ground, and between DTC P0720: Problem in Countershaft Speed terminal C15 and body ground. Sensor Circuit PCM CONNECTOR C (22P) NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before NC (BLU) you troubleshoot.
Page 712 2001 Model 4. Clear the DTC with the scan tool or the HDS. DTC P0730: Problem in Shift Control System 5. Drive the vehicle at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear in D4 position for NOTE: more than 30 seconds.
Page 713 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 2001 Model 4. Clear the DTC with the scan tool or the HDS. DTC P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control 5. Using the scan tool, check to be sure that the System engine coolant temperature is 176°F (80°C) or above.
Page 714 2001 Model 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P0753: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector A Circuit terminals C2 and A25 or A26. NOTE: PCM CONNECTORS • Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before SH A (BLU/YEL) you troubleshoot.
Page 715 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Disconnect the 3P connector from the torque 11. Disconnect PCM connector B (24P). converter clutch solenoid valve-shift solenoid valve A. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector 13.
Page 716 2001 Model 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P0758: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector B Circuit terminals C9 and A25 or A26. NOTE: PCM CONNECTORS • Record all freeze data and review General C (22P) A (31P) Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before...
Page 717 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector (2P). 11. Disconnect PCM connector B (24P). 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminals C9 and A25 or A26. 13. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals B24 and A25 or A26.
Page 718 2001 Model 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P0763: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector C Circuit terminals C17 and A25 or A26. NOTE: PCM CONNECTORS • Record all freeze data and review General C (22P) A (31P) Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before...
Page 719 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve C connector 11. Disconnect PCM connector B (24P). (2P). 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals C17 and A25 or A26 13.
Page 720 2001 Model DTC P0780: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic Control System for Shift Solenoid Valve A and A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B, or Problem in Hydraulic Control System NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 721 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 2001 Model 7. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C21 and A25 or A26. DTC P1705: Short in Transmission Range Switch Circuit PCM CONNECTORS A (31P) C (22P) NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 722 10. Shift to any position other than D4. 12. Shift to any position other than D3. 11. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 13. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C13 and A25 or A26. terminals C4 and A25 or A26. PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS A (31P)
Page 723 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 14. Shift to any position other than 2. 16. Shift to any position other than 1. 15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 17. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C12 and A25 or A26. terminals C20 and A25 or A26.
Page 724 2001 Model 5. Shift to D4 position. DTC P1706: Open in Transmission Range 6. Measure the voltage between PCM connector Switch Circuit terminals C13 and A25 or A26. NOTE: PCM CONNECTORS • Record all freeze data and review General A (31P) C (22P) Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 725 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 9. Shift to P or N position. 13. Shift to 2 position. 10. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C22 and A25 or A26. terminals C12 and A25 or A26. PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS A (31P)
Page 726 2001 Model 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P1738: Problem in 2nd Clutch Pressure 4. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P). Switch Circuit 5. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General connector. Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 727 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch securely supported. pressure switch connector terminal and body ground. 8. Set the parking brake, and block the rear wheels 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE securely.
Page 728 2001 Model 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P1739: Problem in 3rd Clutch Pressure 4. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P). Switch Circuit 5. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General connector. Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 729 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch securely supported. pressure switch connector terminal and body ground. 8. Set the parking brake, and block the rear wheels 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE securely.
Page 730 2001 Model DTC P1750: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic Control System for A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B, or Problem in Hydraulic Control System NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 731 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 2001 Model DTC P1751: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic Control System for Shift Solenoid Valve B and A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B, or Problem in Hydraulic Control System NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before you troubleshoot.
Page 732 2001 Model 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC P1753: Problem in Torque Converter 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit terminals C10 and A25 or A26. NOTE: PCM CONNECTORS • Record all freeze data and review General C (22P) A (31P) Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before...
Page 733 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Disconnect the 3P connector from the torque converter clutch solenoid valve-shift solenoid valve 11. Disconnect PCM connector B (24P). 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals C10 and A25 or A26. 13.
Page 734 2001 Model 4. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B7 and body ground, and between DTC P1768: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure terminal C1 and body ground. Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit PCM CONNECTORS NOTE: LS AP (RED) LS AM (WHT) •...
Page 735 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 7. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A25 and body ground, and between 9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminal A26 and body ground.
Page 736 2001 Model 4. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B16 and body ground, and between DTC P1773: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure terminal C8 and body ground. Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit PCM CONNECTORS NOTE: B (24P) C (22P) •...
Page 737 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 7. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A25 and body ground, and between 9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminal A26 and body ground.
Page 738: Road Test
Road Test Special Tools Required 8. Connect a digital multimeter (A) and the special Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required) tools (B) to check voltage between these PCM connector terminals. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). •...
Page 739 Automatic Transmission Road Test (cont’d) 9. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the D4 10. Accelerate to about 35 mph (57 km/h) so the position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch transmission is in 4th or 5th, then shift from the D4 slippage.
Page 740: Stall Speed Test
Stall Speed Test 1. Engage the parking brake, and block all four wheels. 7. If the measurements are out of the service limit, problems and probable causes are listed in the 2. Connect a tachometer to the engine, and start the table below: engine.
Page 741: Pressure Test
Automatic Transmission Pressure Test Special Tools Required 6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to the 1st clutch • A/T oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020400 or pressure inspection hole (B), 3rd clutch pressure 07406-0020401 inspection hole (D), and 4th clutch pressure •...
Page 742 8. Start the engine, and run it at 2,000 rpm in the N or 19. Shift to the R position. Raise the engine rpm to P position. 2,000 rpm, and measure 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection hole (E). 9.
Page 743: Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve-Shift Solenoid Valve A Test
Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift control NOTE: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A.
Page 744: Shift Solenoid Valve B And C Test
Shift Solenoid Valve B and C Test Shift Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement 1. Remove the starter. 2. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B (A) or C (B) NOTE: If the shift solenoid valve B and C are replaced or connector.
Page 745: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A And B Test
Automatic Transmission A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test 1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the A/T clutch 7. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No.
Page 746: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A And B Replacement
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement 1. Remove the ATF cooler hose (outlet line) at the ATF 5. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of cooler line. Turn the end of the cooler hose up to the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the line and B and the transmission housing.
Page 747: Mainshaft And Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement
Automatic Transmission Mainshaft and Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the connectors from the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensors. 2. Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed sensor, then remove the mainshaft speed sensor from the end cover. 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 3.
Page 748: 2Nd Clutch Pressure Switch Replacement
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch 3rd Clutch Pressure Switch Replacement Replacement 1. Disconnect the connector from the 2nd clutch 1. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch pressure switch. pressure switch. 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft) 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft) 2.
Page 749: Atf Level Check
(A) to bring the fluid level up to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60 90 seconds Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift after turning the engine off. quality 3.
Page 750: Atf Replacement
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic (the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the engine off.
Page 751: Transmission Removal
• Engine support hanger 07XAA-001030A on the starter. • Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019 • Subframe adapter EQS07AODSY0 (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857) 1. Before disconnecting the battery, make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio’s preset stations.
Page 752 14. Disconnect the connectors from the 3rd clutch 18. Disconnect the connectors from the countershaft pressure switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (B), speed sensor (A), and 2nd clutch pressure switch and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A (B). and B (C), then remove the harness clamps from the clamp brackets.
Page 753 Automatic Transmission Transmission Removal (cont’d) 21. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts. 23. Lift and support the engine with engine support hanger (A) and engine balance bar (B). Attatch the front arm (C) to the front cylinder head with a spacer (D) and the 10 x 1.25 mm bolt (E).
Page 754 25. Remove the oxygen sensor connectors (A) from 29. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (A), their connector brackets (B), and remove the then remove the shift cable cover (B). harnesses from the clamps (C). NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever (C), remove the bolts securing the holder before removing the bolts securing the cover.
Page 755 Automatic Transmission Transmission Removal (cont’d) 32. Remove the torque converter cover (A), then 36. Remove the stiffener (A), the steering gearbox remove the eight drive plate bolts (B) one at a time mounting bolt (B) and nut (C). while rotating the crankshaft pulley. 33.
Page 756 NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used with the Honda transmission jack (model number LSL-W 93714) or powertrain lift (model number OTC-1585), both available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. It will also work with most commercially available transmission jacks.
Page 757 Automatic Transmission Transmission Removal (cont’d) 43. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on 46. Remove the 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (A), subframe the corner of the jack base, then attach the adapter mounting bolts (4) (B), and the stiffeners (C), then to the jack base with the bolts (A) that came with lower the front subframe (D).
Page 758 49. Pry the left driveshaft out of the differential and the 53. Remove the front mount bracket. right driveshaft from the intermediate shaft (see step 10 on page 16-4). 50. Move the left driveshaft to the front side. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil, then tie the plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
Page 759: Drive Plate Removal And Installation
Automatic Transmission Transmission Removal (cont’d) Drive Plate Removal and Installation 55. Lower the transmission, and tilt the engine just enough for the transmission to clear its end cover from the side frame. 1. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the engine crankshaft 56.
Page 760: Transmission Installation
Transmission Installation 1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-155). 6. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install the transmission housing mounting bolts. 2. Install the transmission lower mounts (A). 10 x 1.25 mm 38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft) 12 x 1.25 mm 64 N·m, (6.5 kgf·m,...
Page 761 Automatic Transmission Transmission Installation (cont’d) 8. Install the engine stiffener mounting bolts (A). 12. Install new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft (B). 10 x 1.25 mm 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm 10 x 1.25 mm...
Page 762 14. Install a new set ring on the right driveshaft. 17. Loosely install the subframe mounting bolts (4) (A) and the 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (6) (B) with the 15. Install the right and left driveshaft. While installing stiffeners (C), then tighten the bolts to the specified the left driveshaft in the differential, be sure not to torque by aligning all reference marks (D).
Page 763 Automatic Transmission Transmission Installation (cont’d) 18. Install the transmission lower mount nuts. 20. Install the rear mount mounting bolts (A). 10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft) 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm 38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft)
Page 764 23. Install the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) and 28. Install the ball joints on each lower arms (A) with the power steering fluid pipe bracket bolts (B). the castle nuts (hex nuts) (B) and spring pins (C). 6 x 1.0 mm 12 x 1.25 mm 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 78 N·m (7.0 kgf·m,...
Page 765 Automatic Transmission Transmission Installation (cont’d) 32. Install the splash shield. 34. Install and tighten the nut (A) on the front mount. 12 x 1.25 mm 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) 33. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts. 35. Connect the vacuum tube (B). 36.
Page 766 39. Install the harness cover (A) on the transmission 42. Connect the connectors to the shift solenoid valve hanger (B), then install the connector bracket (C). B (A) and shift solenoid valve C (B), then install the clamp on the clamp bracket. 8 x 1.25 mm 26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m, 10 x 1.25 mm...
Page 767 Automatic Transmission Transmission Installation (cont’d) 45. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler 51. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page lines (B) (see page 14-156). Clamp the ATF cooler 14-137). hose with the clamp (C) on the starter. 52.
Page 768: Atf Cooler Flushing
ATF Cooler Flushing Special Tools Required 7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the Commercially Available Transmission Cooler Flusher water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if Kent-Moore J38405-A or equivalent available.) This procedure should be performed before reinstalling the transmission.
Page 769: Atf Cooler Hose Replacement
Automatic Transmission ATF Cooler Flushing (cont’d) ATF Cooler Hose Replacement 17. Make sure the transmission is in the P position. 1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (B) and the Fill the transmission with ATF, and run the engine ATF cooler, and secure them with the clips (C).
Page 770: Shift Lever Removal
Shift Lever Removal SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A) SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the and the park pin switch connector (B). precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service.
Page 771: Shift Lever Installation
Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Install the shift lever assembly on the steering column.
Page 772: Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly Apply silicone grease to these parts: • Sliding surfaces on the detent plate. • Sliding area on shift lever and control bracket. • Movable parts of the shift lock mechanism. • Select link and shift lever contacting area. •...
Page 773: Shift Cable Replacement
Automatic Transmission Shift Cable Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the 7. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the grommet (B). precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS 6 x 1.0 mm before performing repairs or service.
Page 774 10. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket. N position indicator comes on. 11. Verify that the transmission is in the N position on 16.
Page 775: Shift Cable Adjustment
Automatic Transmission Shift Cable Adjustment SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release it. SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the shift precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS lever position is in the N.
Page 776 9. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) 11. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from with the slot in the shift cable bracket (C), then slide the shift cable bracket, and reinstalled the shift the holder into the bracket. Install the shift cable cable.
Page 777: A/T Gear Position Indicator
A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR D4 Indicator Cicuit Troubleshooting 1999-2000 models, page 14-166 2001 model, page 14-169 Indicator Input Test, page 14-172 Indicator Bulb Replacement, page 14-176 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH Test, page 14-173 Replacement, page 14-174 14-164...
Page 778: Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram NOTE: PCM terminal number shows the number of the 1999 2000 models/2001 models. DRIVER’S UNDER DASH IGNITION UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX SWITCH BATTERY No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) No.9 (10A) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) A9/E26 A14/E5 D6/C21 D14/ D15/ B14/...
Page 779: D4 Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
A/T Gear Position Indicator D4 Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting 1999-2000 Models 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the D4 10. Shift to any position other than D4. indicator. 11. Measure the voltage between the D9 terminal and Does the D4 indicator come on and stay on? body ground.
Page 780 15. Disconnect the B (25P) connector from the PCM. 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Check for continuity between body ground and B20 20. Reconnect the B (25P) connector to the PCM. and B22 terminals. 21. Connect the digital multimeter between the A14 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) and B20 or B22 terminals.
Page 781 A/T Gear Position Indicator D4 Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 24. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). 25. Check for continuity between the A14 terminal and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) D4 IND (GRN/BLK) Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity? Repair short to ground in the wire between the A14 terminal and the gauge assembly.
Page 782: 2001 Model
2001 Model 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the D4 10. Shift to any position other than D4. indicator. 11. Measure the voltage between PCM connector Does the D4 indicator come on and stay on? terminal C13 and body ground.
Page 783 A/T Gear Position Indicator D4 Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 15. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P). 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Check for continuity between PCM connector 20. Reconnect PCM connector A (31P). terminal A25 and body ground, and between terminal A26 and body ground.
Page 784 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 24. Disconnect PCM connector E (31P). 25. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) D4 IND (GRN/BLK) Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity? Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal E5 and the gauge assembly.
Page 785: Indicator Input Test
A/T Gear Position Indicator Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors. 2.
Page 786: Transmission Range Switch Test
Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE: Terminal No. 1: Neutral position switch Transmission Range Switch Continuity Check Terminal Position...
Page 787: Transmission Range Switch Replacement
A/T Gear Position Indicator Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 7. Set the transmission range switch to the N position. securely supported (see page 1-15). NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in the 2.
Page 788 9. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever the control shaft (B), then secure it with the bolts. through all gears, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear NOTE: Take care not to move the transmission position indicator.
Page 789: Indicator Bulb Replacement
A/T Gear Position Indicator Indicator Bulb Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the gauge assembly (see page 22-100). 2.
Page 790 A/T Interlock System Component Location Index SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-179 Test, page 14-185 Replacement, page 14-186 PARK PIN SWITCH Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-182 Test, page 14-187 STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID KEY INTERLOCK SWITCH Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-182...
Page 791: Circuit Diagram
A/T Interlock System Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BATTERY No.47 (20A) WHT/YEL IGNITION SWITCH No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) No.9 (10A) WHT/YEL STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH INTERLOCK (BRAKE SWITCH SWITCH) SHIFT LOCK INTERLOCK SOLENOID SOLENOID WHT/RED SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DRIVER’S)
Page 792 Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Press the brake pedal. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Are the brake lights ON? 6. Disconnect these connectors from the PCM: Go to step 2. • 1999-2000 models: A (32P) and B (25P) connectors.
Page 793: Shift Lock System Circuit
A/T Interlock System Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d) 8. Reconnect the disconnected connectors to the PCM. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 14. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 and No. 3 terminals of the TPS connector.
Page 794 17. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of 20. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid the shift lock solenoid connector and the No. 22 connector to the battery positive terminal, and terminal of the multiplex control unit (driver’s) 22P connect the No.
Page 795: Key Interlock System Circuit
A/T Interlock System Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Disconnect the key switch connector (7P) from the 5. Measure the voltage between the No. 7 terminal steering lock assembly. and body ground. 2. Connect the No. 7 terminal of the key switch KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P) connector to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No.
Page 796 8. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of the park pin switch connector and the No. 5 terminal of the key switch connector. KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P) WHT/RED PARK PIN SWITCH CONNECTOR WHT/RED Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity? Go to step 9.
Page 797: Control Unit Input Test
A/T Interlock System Control Unit Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Disconnect the 22P connector from the multiplex control unit, driver’s, then remove the control unit from the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box.
Page 798: Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service.
Page 799: Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
A/T Interlock System Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Remove the screws (A) securing the shift lock SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the solenoid (B), then remove the shift lock solenoid. precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service.
Page 800: Park Pin Switch Test
Park Pin Switch Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17- 25).
Page 801: Transmission End Cover
Transmission End Cover End Cover and Idler Gear Removal Exploded View TRANSMISSION RANGE END COVER SWITCH COVER END COVER GASKET Replace. HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET MAINSHAFT LOCKNUT Replace. TRANSMISSION RANGE PITOT PIPE SWITCH LUBRICATION PITOT PIPE SECONDARY SHAFT LOCKNUT Replace. COUNTERSHAFT LOCKNUT Replace.
Page 802 Special Tools Required 5. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft. Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the following procedure. 1. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 2. Remove the harness clamp bolt and the two transmission range switch bolts, then remove the transmission range switch.
Page 803: Park Lever Stop Inspection And Adjustment
Transmission End Cover End Cover and Idler Gear Removal Park Lever Stop Inspection and (cont’d) Adjustment 9. Remove the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the 1. Set the park lever (A) in the P position. secondary shaft idler gear (B) with a puller (C). 6 x 1.0 mm 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft) 2.
Page 804: Transmission Housing
Transmission Housing Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal Exploded View TRANSMISSION HOUSING REVERSE IDLER GEAR MOUNTING BOLTS SHAFT HOLDER REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR TRANSMISSION HANGER/ HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE GEAR LOCK WASHER Replace. SHIFT FORK TRANSMISSION HOUSING TRANSMISSION HANGER REVERSE IDLER...
Page 805 Transmission Housing Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal (cont’d) Special Tools Required 4. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) with Housing puller 07HAC-PK40102 the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the control shaft. NOTE: Refer to the exploded view as needed during the 07HAC-PK40102 following procedure.
Page 806: Bearing Removal And Installation
Bearing Removal and Installation Special Tools Required 4. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into • Driver 07749-0010000 the housing until the snap ring snaps in place • Seal driver attachment around it. 07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG40100 • Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 •...
Page 807 Valve Body Valve Body and ATF Strainer Removal Exploded View 6 x 1.0 mm, ATF FEED PIPE, 6 x 1.0 mm, Two Bolts 8 x 198 mm Eight Bolts ATF FEED PIPES, SERVO DETENT 6 x 1.0 mm, 8 x 85 mm, Three Pipes BASE Two Bolts ATF FEED...
Page 808 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 16. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B) following procedure. thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it is in good condition, and the inlet opening is not 1.
Page 809: Valve Body Repair
Valve Body Valve Body Repair NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of 5. Remove the 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with bores.
Page 810 Valve Body Valve Reassembly 1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly. 2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence shown for the main valve body (see page 14-198), regulator valve body (see page 14-201), and servo body (see page 14-202). Refer to the following valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so the end shown facing up will be facing the outside of the valve body.
Page 811: Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, And Reassembly
Valve Body Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly 1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. 2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check valve ball; it may magnetize the ball. 3.
Page 812 Sectional View FILTER MAIN VALVE BODY Sectional View MANUAL VALVE SPRING SPECIFICATIONS Spring Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.) Wire Dia. O.D. Free Length No. of Coils Modulator valve spring 1.6 (0.063) 10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7...
Page 813: Atf Pump Inspection
Valve Body ATF Pump Inspection 1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main gear (A) and driven gear (B). valve body (D).
Page 814: Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, And Reassembly
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly 1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. 2. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-196). 3.
Page 815: Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, And Reassembly
Valve Body Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly 1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. 2. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-196). 3.
Page 816: Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, And Reassembly
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly 1. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls; it may magnetize the balls. 2. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages.
Page 817: Torque Converter Housing
Torque Converter Housing Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing with • Adjustable bearing puller, 25 40 mm the special tools. 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A 07749-0010000 • Driver 07749-0010000 •...
Page 818: Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Countershaft Bearing Replacement Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required • Adjustable bearing puller, 25 40 mm 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Special Tools Required • Driver 07749-0010000 • Adjustable bearing puller, 25 40 mm • Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A •...
Page 819: Shafts And Clutches
Shafts and Clutches Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly 1. Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly. LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT) Replace. 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft) 0 THRUST WASHER, 167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123 lbf·ft) 27 x 47 x 5 mm CONICAL SPRING WASHER Replace.
Page 820: 3Rd/4Th Clutch Clearance Inspection
3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the O-rings from the mainshaft. 3. Hold the 4th gear collar (C) against the clutch assembly (B), then measure the clearance between 2. Assemble the 41 x 73 mm thrust shim (A), 3rd/4th the clutch guide (E) and the 4th gear collar with a clutch assembly (B), and 4th gear collar (C) on the feeler gauge (F) in at least three places.
Page 821: Mainshaft Sealing Ring Replacement
Shafts and Clutches Mainshaft Sealing Ring Replacement The sealing rings are synthetic resin with chamfered ends. Check the condition of the sealing rings, and replace them only if they are worn, distorted, or damaged. 1. For a better fit, squeeze sealing rings together slightly before installing them.
Page 822: Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, And Reassembly
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly 1. Remove the locknut, and take off components down to the reverse selector hub. LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT) CONICAL SPRING WASHER Replace. Replace. Left-hand threads 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft) 0 167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123 lbf·ft) 2ND GEAR BALL BEARING BEARING HUB...
Page 823: Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3Rd Gear, And 1St Gear Removal
Shafts and Clutches Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Removal 1. Remove the reverse selector hub (A) and the 4th 2. Remove the needle bearing, snap ring, distance gear (B) from the countershaft with a press. Place a collar, and 31 mm cotters from the countershaft.
Page 824: Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3Rd Gear, And 1St Gear Installation
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Installation Special Tools Required 4. Install the 31 mm cotters, distance collar, snap ring, Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 needle bearing, and 4th gear (A) on the countershaft. 1. Apply ATF to the parts. 5.
Page 825: Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing Replacement
Shafts and Clutches Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required • Driver 07749-0010000 • Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 • Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it.
Page 826: Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, And Reassembly
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly 1. Remove the locknut, and disassemble the shaft and gears. LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT) Replace. Left-hand threads 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft) 0 167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123 lbf·ft) CONICAL SPRING WASHER Replace. THRUST NEEDLE BALL BEARING BEARING IDLER GEAR...
Page 827: Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection
Shafts and Clutches Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the O-rings from the shaft. 3. Measure the clearance between the 38 x 56.5 mm splined washer (E) and cotters (F) with a feeler 2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), needle gauge (J) in at least three places.
Page 828 6. Remove the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer from the 9. Hold the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer (G) against mainshaft. the clutch assembly (A), and measure the 2nd gear axial clearance in at least three places while 7.
Page 829: Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement
Shafts and Clutches Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required 4. Install the bearing on the secondary shaft idler gear • Driver 07749-0010000 with the special tools and a press. • Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 07749-0010000 1.
Page 830: Clutch Disassembly
Clutch Disassembly Special Tools Required 3. Install the special tools on the clutch assembly. • Clutch spring compressor attachment 07LAE-PX40100 07LAE-PX40100 • Clutch spring compressor attachment 07HAE-PL50101 • Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A 1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch end plate, the clutch discs, and the plates with a screwdriver (B).
Page 831 Shafts and Clutches Clutch Disassembly (cont’d) 5. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of 7. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be the 1st and 2nd clutches so the special tool contacts removed. the clutch return spring (C). 8.
Page 832 9. For 3rd and 4th clutch: Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum (A), and apply air pressure to the fluid passage to remove the piston (B). Place a finger tip on the other end while applying air pressure. 14-219...
Page 833: Clutch Inspection
Shafts and Clutches Clutch Inspection 1ST/2ND CLUTCH SNAP RING O-RINGS Replace. CLUTCH END PLATE CLUTCH PISTON CLUTCH PLATE Standard thickness: 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) CLUTCH DISCS DISC SPRING Standard thickness: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) RETURN SPRING O-RING Replace. SPRING RETAINER SNAP RING SNAP RING SPRING RETAINER...
Page 834 3RD/4TH CLUTCH SNAP RING CLUTCH DISCS Standard thickness: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) CLUTCH END PLATE CLUTCH PLATES Standard thickness: 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) O-RINGS Replace. CHECK VALVE CLUTCH PISTON DISC SPRING SNAP RING CLUTCH PLATES RETURN SPRING SPRING RETAINER Standard thickness: 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) SPRING RETAINER RETURN SPRING...
Page 835: Clutch Reassembly
Shafts and Clutches Clutch Reassembly Special Tools Required 3. Install new O-rings (A) on the piston (B). • Clutch spring compressor attachment 07LAE-PX40100 • Clutch spring compressor attachment 07HAE-PL50101 • Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A • Clutch compressor attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100 Note these items during reassembly: •...
Page 836 5. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B), 7. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer. contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and 4th clutches.
Page 837 Shafts and Clutches Clutch Reassembly (cont’d) 10. Compress the return spring. 14. Make sure the inside of the clutch drum is free of dirt and other foreign matter. 15. Starting with a clutch plate, alternately install the clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate (A) with the flat side toward the disc (B).
Page 838 17. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end plate (B). 21. If the clearance is not within the service limit, select a new clutch end plate from the following table. NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed, but the clearance is still over the standard, replace the clutch discs and clutch plates as a set.
Page 839 Valve Body Valve Body and ATF Strainer Installation Exploded View Torque: 6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 8 x 1.25 mm: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm, ATF FEED PIPE, 6 x 1.0 mm, Two Bolts 8 x 198 mm Eight Bolts...
Page 840 1. Install the main separator plate (A) and three dowel 4. Install the cooler check valve and spring on the pins on the torque converter housing. Then install main valve body, then install the two dowel pins the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C) and and the regulator separator plate.
Page 841: Shaft Assembly And Housing Installation
Transmission Housing Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation Exploded View REVERSE IDLER GEAR 8 x 1.25 mm TRANSMISSION HOUSING SHAFT HOLDER 26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m, MOUNTING BOLTS 20 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE GEAR...
Page 842 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 5. Place the thrust washer (A) in the transmission following procedure. housing. 1. Install the differential assembly, countershaft subassembly, mainshaft subassembly, and secondary shaft subassembly in the torque converter housing. 2.
Page 843 Transmission Housing Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation (cont’d) 7. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) with 10. Engage the reverse idler gear with the countershaft the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the reverse gear and the mainshaft reverse gear. Then control shaft.
Page 844: End Cover And Idler Gear Installation
Transmission End Cover End Cover and Idler Gear Installation Special Tools Required 3. Install the park gear (A) using the old locknut (B) Mainshaft holder and a collar (C). Hold the park pawl (D) against the 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 park gear, then tighten the old locknut until the shaft splines come out slightly over the park gear 1.
Page 845 Transmission End Cover End Cover and Idler Gear Installation (cont’d) 5. Remove the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) with 7. Set the dial indicator (A) to the countershaft idler a puller (B). gear (B) as shown. 6. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing (B), countershaft idler gear (C), thrust needle 8.
Page 846 9. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 14. Lubricate the following parts with ATF: bearing hub/bearing assembly using a puller as described. • Splines of the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and idler gears. 10. Select and install the new bearing hub/bearing •...
Page 847 Transmission End Cover End Cover and Idler Gear Installation (cont’d) 18. Lubricate the threads of each shaft, the new 22. Install the pitot flange (A) on the mainshaft idler locknuts, and the new conical spring washers with gear (B), then install the lubrication pitot pipe (C) ATF.
Page 848 26. Install the end cover (A) with the two dowel pins, 28. Set the control shaft (A) to the N position by turning new O-rings, new gasket, and harness clamp bracket (B). Tighten the 16 bolts to 12 N·m, (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft).
Page 849 Transmission End Cover End Cover and Idler Gear Installation (cont’d) 29. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B), then secure it with the bolts. Take care not to move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
Page 850: Backlash Inspection
A/T Differential Component Location Index Backlash Inspection 1. Install both axles, and place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A). THRUST SHIM, 76 mm THRUST WASHER BEARING OUTER RACE Replacement, page 14-240 CARRIER BEARING Replacement, page 14-238 2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (B) with a dial indicator (C).
Page 851: Differential Carrier, Final Driven Gear Replacement
A/T Differential Differential Carrier, Final Driven Carrier Bearing Replacement Gear Replacement Special Tools Required Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAD-PW50601 1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential carrier. NOTE: • The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand set.
Page 852: Oil Seal Replacement
Oil Seal Replacement Special Tools Required 4. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing • Driver 07749-0010000 with the special tools. • Seal driver attachment 07749-0010000 07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG40100 • Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101 1. Remove the differential assembly. 2.
Page 853: Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
A/T Differential Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement Special Tools Required 4. Install the thrust washer (A) and outer race (B) in • Driver 07749-0010000 the torque converter housing (C), and use the • Driver attachment 07HAD-SF10100 special tools to make sure the outer race bottoms out in the housing.
Page 854: Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection Special Tools Required 4. Install the 76 mm thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B), • Driver 07749-0010000 and bearing outer race (C) in the transmission • Driver attachment 07HAD-SF10100 housing (D). If you replace the 76 mm thrust shim •...
Page 855 A/T Differential Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont’d) 7. Install the differential assembly (A), gasket (B), and 9. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions dowel pins (C) on the torque converter housing (D). to seat the bearings. Align the spring pin on the control shaft (E) with the transmission housing groove.
Page 856 11. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the thrust shim and select the thrust shim from table. Install the new thrust shim and recheck. To increase the starting torque, increase the thickness of the thrust shim. To decrease the starting torque, decrease the thickness of the shim.
Page 857 5-speed Automatic Transmission (2002-2004 Models) Automatic Transmission A/T Gear Position Indicator Special Tools ..................... 14-246 Component Location Index ............ . 14-397 General Troubleshooting Information ....14-247 Circuit Diagram .................... . 14-398 D Indicator Circuit Troubleshootig ....
Page 858: Valve Body And Atf Strainer Removal
03/07/29 09:35:58 61S0X050_140_0248 Valve Body A/T Differential Valve Body and ATF Strainer Removal ....14-426 Component Location Index ............ . 14-477 Valve Body Repair .................. . 14-428 Backlash Inspection ................14-477 Valve Body Valve Installation .......
Page 859 03/07/29 09:36:01 61S0X050_140_0249 Automatic Transmission Special Tools Ref. No. Tool Number Description 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 Mainshaft Holder 07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG40100 Seal Driver Attachment 07GAD-SD40101 Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 07HAC-PK40102 Housing Puller 07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 07LAD-PW50601...
Page 860: General Troubleshooting Information
No. 13 fuse in the passenger’s under-dash fuse/ Scan Tool or Honda diagnostic system (HDS), it will relay box for more than 10 seconds. If you do, you indicate the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) when the need to do the following: ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Page 861 3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs. lower cover). Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select Honda System, and SCS mode, then the D indicator will 4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the indicate the DTC.
Page 862 How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM Clear A/T DTCs, and PCM Reset Procedures Special Tools Required 1. Connect the Scan Tool or the HDS to the DLC. Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required) 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1.
Page 863 Automatic Transmission General Troubleshooting Information (cont’d) How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect the Scan Tool or the HDS to the DLC. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4.
Page 864: Dtc Troubleshooting Index
DTC Troubleshooting Index NOTE: Record all freeze data and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 14-247) before you troubleshoot. D Indicator Detection Item Page P0710 (28) Blinks ATF temperature sensor (see page 14-316) P0715 (15) Blinks Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-318) P0720 (9) Blinks...
Page 865: Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Automatic Transmission Symptom Troubleshooting Index These symptoms DO NOT trigger diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) or cause the D indicator to blink. If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) was reported ON or the D indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If the vehicle has one of the symptoms in the following chart, check the probable cause(s) for it, in the sequence listed, until you find the problem.
Page 866 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Engine runs, but Low ATF level • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler lines for vehicle does not Shift cable broken or out leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush the move in any gear of adjustment ATF cooler lines.
Page 867 Automatic Transmission Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Vehicle moves in 1st-hold accumulator • Check the 1st-hold clutch pressure. D, D3, 2, and R, defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold/2nd clutch but not in 1 1st-hold clutch assembly for wear and damage.
Page 868 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Poor acceleration; Low ATF level • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler lines for flares on starting Shift cable broken or out leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush the off in D and D3; of adjustment ATF cooler lines.
Page 869 Automatic Transmission Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Poor acceleration; Torque converter clutch Check for a stuck lock-up valve in the valve body. stall speed low solenoid valve defective Engine output low Lock-up clutch piston defective Lock-up shift valve defective Engine idle Low ATF level...
Page 870 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Late shift after Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check the D indicator, and check for loose shifting from N A/T clutch pressure control connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift to D and D3, or solenoid valves A and B defective solenoid valve for seizure.
Page 871 Automatic Transmission Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes The A/T does not Input shaft (mainshaft) • Check the D indicator, and check for loose connectors. shift speed sensor defective • Check the line pressure. Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor defective Modulator valve defective...
Page 872 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Excessive shock, Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check the D indicator, and check for loose connectors. or flares on 2-3 A/T clutch pressure control Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve upshift or 3-2 solenoid valves A and B defective for seizure.
Page 873 Automatic Transmission Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d) Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Noise from ATF pump worn or binding • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque transmission in all Torque converter housing or converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The shift lever transmission housing bearing symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or...
Page 874 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes Torque converter clutch Torque converter clutch • Check the D indicator, and check for loose does not operate solenoid valve defective connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure smoothly A/T clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket for wear solenoid valve C defective and damage.
Page 875: System Description
Automatic Transmission System Description General Operation The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled unit which provides 5 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the engine. Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit.
Page 876 Gear Selection The shift lever has seven positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: 1st through 5th gear ranges, D3: 1st through 3rd gear ranges, 2: 2nd gear, 1: 1st gear. Position Description P: PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All clutches are released.
Page 877 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Clutches The 5-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don’t slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear.
Page 878 Transmission Cutaway View MAINSHAFT 5TH GEAR ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR 5TH CLUTCH RING GEAR 4TH CLUTCH MAINSHAFT TORQUE CONVERTER REVERSE GEAR MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR MAINSHAFT LOCK-UP CLUTCH MAINSHAFT PISTON 3RD GEAR COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE GEAR COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR 3RD CLUTCH REVERSE SELECTOR HUB COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE SELECTOR...
Page 879: Power Flow
Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Power Flow Gear operation Gears on the mainshaft: • 4th gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch. • 5th gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch. • Reverse gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch. •...
Page 880 P Position Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear. N Position Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft 3rd gear, the countershaft 3rd gear, and the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
Page 881 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Power Flow (cont’d) 1 Position In 1 position, hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch. The power flow when accelerating is as follows: • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
Page 882 1 Position The power flow when decelerating is as follows: • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch. Rolling resistance from the road surface goes through the front wheels to the final drive gear, then to the secondary shaft idler gear. •...
Page 883 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Power Flow (cont’d) In D or D3 position, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears according to conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed. D or D3 Position in 1st gear •...
Page 884 D or D3 Position in 2nd gear and 2 Position • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the secondary shaft. • The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft 3rd gear and secondary shaft idler gear. •...
Page 885 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Power Flow (cont’d) D or D3 Position in 3rd gear • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the countershaft 3rd gear with the countershaft. • The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft. •...
Page 886 D Position in 4th gear • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the mainshaft. • The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft. • Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear. •...
Page 887 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Power Flow (cont’d) D Position in 5th gear • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 5th gear while the shift lever is in the forward range (D, D3, 2, and 1 position). •...
Page 888 R Position • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft (reverse gear while the shift lever is in the R position). • Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the mainshaft.
Page 889 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System Functional Diagram The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and solenoid valves. Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM recieves input signals from the sensors, switches, and other control units, perform processing data, and outputs signals for the engine control system and A/T control system.
Page 890 Electronic Control Location MULTIPLEX CONTROL POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) UNIT, DRIVER’S OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR TORQUE CONVERTER A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR 3RD CLUTCH...
Page 891 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System Shift Control The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and switches, and it actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, and C to control shifting. Also, as grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in the D and D3 positions.
Page 892 The PCM turns on the shift solenoid valves A, B, and C to control shifting transmission gear. The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, and C are shown in the table. Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves D, D3 Shifting from the N position Stays in 1st...
Page 893 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in the D and D3 positions, the system extends the engagement area of 2nd gear, 3rd gear, and 4th gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and 5th gear, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power when needed.
Page 894 Clutch Pressure Control The PCM actuates the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C to control the clutch pressure. When shifting between lower and higher gears, the clutch pressure regulated by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C engages and disengages the clutch smoothly.
Page 895 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) Lock-up Control The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and OFF. The PCM actuates the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C to control the torque converter clutch lock-up on.
Page 896 PCM Electrical Connections IGNITION SWITCH VB SOL LS A BATTERY A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A PGM FI LS A MAIN RELAY LS B IGP1 A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B IGP2 LS B BRAKE PEDAL LS C POSITION SWITCH A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID...
Page 897 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions for the A/T control system are shown. PCM Connector Terminal Locations E (20P) A (32P) B (25P) C (31P) D (16P) PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Terminal Wire...
Page 898 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage Number color YEL/BLK IGP1 Power supply circuit from main With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage relay With ignition switch OFF: 0 V Ground Less than 1.0 V at all times LS A A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A power supply...
Page 899 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Electronic Control System (cont’d) PCM Inputs and Outputs (cont’d) PCM Connector Terminal Locations E (20P) A (32P) B (25P) C (31P) D (16P) PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage Number color Torque converter clutch During lock-up condition: Battery voltage...
Page 900 PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage Number color ATP D3 Transmission range switch In the D3 position: 0 V D3 position input In other than the D3 position: Battery voltage ATP D5 Transmission range switch D In the D position: 0 V position input In other than the D position: Battery voltage...
Page 901 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Controls The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body and the accumulator body. The ATF pump is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve, directing pressure to each of the clutches.
Page 902 Main Valve Body The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the servo control valve, the cooler check valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, the kick-down valve, the kick-down short valve, and the ATF pump gears.
Page 903 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Controls (cont’d) Regulator Valve The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through B and B’. Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity.
Page 904 Servo Body The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, CPC valves A and B. CPC VALVE B CPC VALVE A SERVO BODY SHIFT VALVE A SERVO VALVE SHIFT VALVE B Top Accumulator Body...
Page 905 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure that’s regulated by the regulator valve.
Page 906 N Position The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valve and positions of the shift valve are as follows: • The shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A moves to the left side. •...
Page 907 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) D Position: 1st gear shifting from the N position Shift solenoid valves remain the same as in the N position when shifting to the D position from the N position. The manual valve is moved to the D position, and switches the port of line pressure (4) leading to shift valve C and CPC valve B.
Page 908 D Position: Driving in 1st gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valves A and C ON, and shift solenoid valve B keeps ON. SH A pressure (SA) in the right side of shift valves A and E is released, and shift valves A and E are moved to the right side. SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released, and modulator pressure (6) is applied to the left side of shift valve C.
Page 909 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) D Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. LS B pressure (57) in the right side of CPC valve B is released, and LS A pressure (56) is applied to the right side of CPC valve A.
Page 910 D Position: Driving in 2nd gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift solenoid valves A and B stays ON. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure.
Page 911 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) D Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM also controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valve B keeps ON, and C keeps OFF.
Page 912 D Position: Driving in 3rd gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A pressure (56) in CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A stays OFF, and B stays ON. Releasing LS A pressure (56) in CPC valve A releases CPC A pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit.
Page 913 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) D Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF. The PCM also controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A stays OFF, and C stays ON.
Page 914 D Position: Driving in 4th gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release LS B pressure (57) in CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valves A and B stays OFF. Releasing LS B pressure (57) in CPC valve B releases CPC B pressure in the 3rd clutch pressure circuit.
Page 915 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) D Position: Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON. The PCM also controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valves B and C stays OFF.
Page 916 D Position: Driving in 5th gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A pressure (56) in CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A stays ON, and B stays OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) in CPC valve A releases CPC A pressure in the 4th clutch pressure circuit.
Page 917 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) 2 Position The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of shift valves are as follows: •...
Page 918 1 Position The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of shift valves are as follows: • Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and shift valve A stays on the right side. •...
Page 919 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) R Position: Shifting to the R position from the P or N position Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3) is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes line pressure (3’).
Page 920 R Position: Driving in reverse gear The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift solenoid valve A keeps OFF and B keeps ON. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure.
Page 921 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Hydraulic Flow (cont’d) P Position Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the servo valve.
Page 922 Lock-up System The lock-up mechanism operates in the D position (3rd, 4th, and 5th), and D3 position (3rd). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover.
Page 923 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Lock-up System Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch) Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and fluid entering from the chamber between the pump and stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch piston against the torque converter cover.
Page 924 No Lock-up The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA) on the left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter.
Page 925 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Lock-up System (cont’d) Partial Lock-up As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM to release LC pressure (LA) in the left cavity of the lock-up shift valve. Modulator pressure (6) is applied to the right side of the lock-up shift valve, then the lock-up shift valve is moved in the left side to switch the port leading torque converter pressure to the right side of the torque converter.
Page 926 Full Lock-up When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C to increase LS C pressure (58). The LS C pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve, and moves them to the left side.
Page 927 Automatic Transmission System Description (cont’d) Circuit Diagram UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BATTERY No.47 (20A) WHT/YEL No.41 (120A) No.42 (50A) No.9 (10A) No.6 (15A) IGNITION SWITCH MULTIPLEX CONTROL No.1 (15A) UNIT (DRIVER’S) SHIFT LOCK DRIVER’S SOLENOID UNDER DASH No.54 (40A) No.46 (15A) FUSE/RELAY BOX ATP P PGM FI...
Page 928 ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT INPUT SHAFT COOLANT (COUNTERSHAFT) MAINFOLD ABSOLUTE (MAINSHAFT) THROTTLE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE SPEED SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR SPEED SENSOR POSITION SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR WHT/RED PARK INTERLOCK INTERLOCK SWITCH SWITCH SOLENOID GRN BLU STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY BRAKE G401 GRN/YEL PEDAL POSITION BLU/YEL SWITCH DATA LINK...
Page 929: Dtc Troubleshooting
Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0710: Problem in ATF Temperature 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Sensor Circuit 5. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 2 ATF NOTE: temperature sensor connector and body ground. • Record all freeze data and review General ATF TEMPERATURE Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) SENSOR CONNECTOR...
Page 930 7. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. terminal C24 and body ground. 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P). PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C24 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) ATFT (BLU/YEL) ATFT (BLU/YEL)
Page 931 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0715: A Problem in Input Shaft 6. Measure the voltage between input shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General INPUT SHAFT Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before (MAINSHAFT) SPEED...
Page 932 10. Connect PCM connector D (16P). 14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals D11 and D12. 11. Check for continuity between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 3 PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) and body ground. INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR NM (RED)
Page 933 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 19. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor terminal C28 and body ground. connector. PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) 20. Measure the voltage between PCM Connector terminals D11 and D12. PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) VCC2 (YEL/BLU) NM (RED)
Page 934 DTC P0720: Problem in Output Shaft 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit 8. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P). NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before 9. Check for continuity between output shaft you troubleshoot.
Page 935 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminal C19 and body ground. 12. Measure the voltage between output shaft PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals No.
Page 936 18. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed 20. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is sensor connector. securely supported. 19. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 21. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels terminals D10 and D16.
Page 937 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0730: Problem in Shift Control System 6. Clear the DTC with the scan tool or the HDS. NOTE: 7. Drive the vehicle under the same conditions as • Record all freeze data and review General those indicated by the freeze data, or at speeds Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) over 12 mph (20 km/h) in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th...
Page 938 DTC P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control 5. Clear the DTC with the scan tool or the HDS. System 6. Using the scan tool, check to be sure that the NOTE: engine coolant temperature is 176°F (80°C) or • Record all freeze data and review General above.
Page 939 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0743: Problem in Torque Converter 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector NOTE: terminals D1 and B20 or B22. • Record all freeze data and review General PCM CONNECTORS Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before you troubleshoot.
Page 940 8. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). valve connector (2P). 12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals D5 and B20 or B22. terminals D1 and B20 or B22. PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
Page 941 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0748: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 3. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P). Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit 4. Check for continuity between PCM connector NOTE: terminals B8 and body ground, and between B17 • Record all freeze data and review General and body ground.
Page 942 7. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P). 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals D5 and B20 or B22. PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL (BLK/YEL) B (25P) D (16P) LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL) Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage? Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors.
Page 943 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0753: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. A Circuit 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector NOTE: terminals D7 and B20 or B22. • Record all freeze data and review General PCM CONNECTORS Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before you troubleshoot.
Page 944 8. Disconnect the 2P connector from shift solenoid 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). valve A. 12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals D5 and B20 or B22 . terminals D7 and B20 or B22 . PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
Page 945 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0758: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. A Circuit 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector NOTE: terminals D2 and B20 or B22. • Record all freeze data and review General PCM CONNECTORS Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before you troubleshoot.
Page 946 8. Disconnect the 2P connector from shift solenoid 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). valve B. 12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals D5 and B20 or B22. terminals D2 and B20 or B22 . PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
Page 947 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0763: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. C Circuit 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector NOTE: terminals D3 and B20 or B22. • Record all freeze data and review General PCM CONNECTORS Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before you troubleshoot.
Page 948 8. Disconnect the 2P connector from shift solenoid 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). valve C. 12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals D5 and B20 or B22. terminals D3 and B20 or B22. PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
Page 949 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0778: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 3. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P). Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit 4. Check for continuity between PCM connector NOTE: terminals B18 and body ground, and between B25 • Record all freeze data and review General and body ground.
Page 950 7. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P). 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals D5 and B20 or B22. PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL (BLK/YEL) B (25P) D (16P) LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL) Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage? Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors.
Page 951 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P0780: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic Control System of Shift Solenoid Valve A and A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B, or Problem in the Hydraulic Control System NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before you troubleshoot.
Page 952 DTC P0798: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 3. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P). Control Solenoid Valve C Circuit 4. Check for continuity between PCM connector NOTE: terminals B13 and body ground, and between B24 • Record all freeze data and review General and body ground.
Page 953 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 7. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P). 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals D5 and B20 or B22. PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL (BLK/YEL) B (25P) D (16P) LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL) Wire side of female terminals...
Page 954 DTC P0845: Problem in 3rd Clutch 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit 4. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P). NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before 5. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid you troubleshoot.
Page 955 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch securely supported. transmission fluid pressure switch connector terminal and body ground. 8. Set the parking brake, and block the rear wheels 3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID securely.
Page 956 DTC P1705: Short in Transmission Range 4. Shift to all positions other than P or N. Switch Circuit 5. Measure the voltage between PCM connector NOTE: terminals B14 and B20 or B22 . • Record all freeze data and review General PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before you troubleshoot.
Page 957 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) 6. Shift to all positions other than D. 8. Shift to all positions other than D3. 7. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals D9 and B20 or B22 . terminals D8 and B20 or B22.
Page 958 10. Shift to all positions other than 2. 12. Shift to all positions other than 1. 11. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 13. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals D14 and B20 or B22 . terminals D15 and B20 or B22. PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS B (25P)
Page 959 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1706: Open in Transmission Range 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Switch Circuit 5. Shift to the D position. NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General 6. Measure the voltage between PCM connector Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) terminals D9 and B20 or B22 .
Page 960 9. Shift to the P and N position. 13. Shift to the 2 position. 10. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals B14 and B20 or B22. terminals D14 and B20 or B22. PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTORS B (25P)
Page 961 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1740: Problem in 4th Clutch 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit 4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P). NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before 5.
Page 962 7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 4th clutch securely supported. transmission fluid pressure switch connector terminal and body ground. 8. Set the park brake, and block the rear wheels 4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID securely.
Page 963 Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d) DTC P1750: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic Control System of A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B, or Problem in the Hydraulic Control System NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before you troubleshoot.
Page 964 DTC P1751: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic Control System of Shift Solenoid Valve B and A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B, or Problem in the Hydraulic Control System NOTE: • Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-247) before you troubleshoot.
Page 965: Road Test
Automatic Transmission Road Test Special Tools Required 6. Pull back the carpet, and remove the passenger’s Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required) and driver’s side center lower covers to expose the PCM (see page 11-4). 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
Page 966 10. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the D 11. Accelerate to about 35 mph (57 km/h) so the position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch transmission is in 4th or 5th, then shift from the D slippage. While driving, check that the shift points position to the 2 position.
Page 967: Stall Speed Test
Automatic Transmission Stall Speed Test 1. Engage the parking brake, and block all four wheels. 7. If the measurements are out of the service limit, problems and probable causes are listed in the 2. Connect a tachometer to the engine, and start the table: engine.
Page 968: Pressure Test
Pressure Test Special Tools Required 6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to the 1st clutch • A/T clutch pressure gauge set pressure inspection hole (D), 3rd clutch pressure 07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 inspection hole (E), 4th clutch pressure inspection • A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A hole (F), and 5th clutch pressure inspection hole (G).
Page 969 Automatic Transmission Pressure Test (cont’d) 7. Start the engine, and run it at 2,000 rpm in the P or 18. Shift to the R position. Raise the engine rpm to N position. 2,000 rpm, and measure the reverse clutch pressure at the 5th clutch pressure inspection hole 8.
Page 970: Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test Valve Replacement 1. Disconnect the connector from the torque 1. Remove the mounting bolt and torque converter converter clutch solenoid valve. clutch solenoid valve. 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 2.
Page 971: Shift Solenoid Valve B Test
Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve B Test Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement 1. Disconnect the connector from the shift solenoid 1. Remove the mounting bolt and the shift solenoid valve B. valve B. 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 2.
Page 972 Shift Solenoid Valve A and C Test Shift Solenoid Valve A and C Replacement 1. Remove the starter. 2. Disconnect the shift control solenoid valve A and C NOTE: If shift solenoid valves A and C are replaced or connectors. removed at the same time, be sure to reinstall them correctly.
Page 973 Automatic Transmission A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test 1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the A/T clutch 6. Connect the No. 1 terminal of A/T clutch pressure pressure control solenoid valves A (A) and B (B). control solenoid valves A and B to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No.
Page 974 A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement 1. Remove the harness cover from the transmission 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of hanger. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B and the transmission housing. 2.
Page 975 Automatic Transmission A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Disconnect the connector from A/T clutch pressure 6. Connect the No. 1 terminal of A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. control solenoid valve C to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No.
Page 976 A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Disconnect the connector from A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 2. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (A). 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 3.
Page 977: Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement
Automatic Transmission Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 1. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. sensor connector. 2. Remove the bolt securing the input shaft 2.
Page 978: 3Rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the switch cover (A). 1. Disconnect the connector from the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft) 2.
Page 979: Atf Temperature Sensor Replacement
Automatic Transmission ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the transmission lower mount nuts. 4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the ATF temperature sensor. 6 x 1.0 mm 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm 38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft) 2.
Page 980: Atf Level Check
(A) to bring the fluid level up to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60 90 seconds Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift after turning the engine off. quality.
Page 981: Atf Replacement
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic (the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the engine off.
Page 982: Transmission Removal
(ATF). Reinstall the drain plug • Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019 and a new sealing washer (B). • Subframe adapter EQS07AODSY0 (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment 18 x 1.5 mm Program, 888-424-6857) 49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
Page 983 Automatic Transmission Transmission Removal (cont’d) 13. Remove the ATF cooler hose (A) from the clamp (B) 16. Remove the harness clamps (B) from the brackets on the starter, and paint a white dot (C) on the hose (D), then disconnect the connectors from the shift where it came out of the clamp.
Page 984 19. Disconnect the connectors from the torque 24. Remove the primary heated oxygen sensor converter clutch solenoid valve (A) and shift (Primary HO2S) connector (A) from its connector solenoid valve B. bracket (B). 20. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) from the connector bracket (B).
Page 985 Automatic Transmission Transmission Removal (cont’d) 27. Remove the nut (A) from the front mount (B), and 29. Remove the oxygen sensor connectors (B) from remove the ground cable (C) from the engine. their connector brackets (C), and remove the harness from the clamps (D). 28.
Page 986 33. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (A), 36. Remove the torque converter cover (A), then then remove the shift cable cover (B). remove the eight drive plate bolts (B) one at a time while rotating the crankshaft pulley. NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint, remove the bolts securing the holder before removing the bolt securing the cover.
Page 987 Automatic Transmission Transmission Removal (cont’d) 40. Remove the stiffener (A), the steering gearbox 43. Unclamp the power steering fluid line clamps (A), mounting bolt (B) and nut (C). and remove the bolt (B) securing the power steering fluid line bracket (C). 41.
Page 988 (B), between the subframe and Honda transmission jack (model number LSL- the body. W93714) or powertrain lift (model number OTC- 1585), both available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. It will also work with most commercially available transmission jack. 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Page 989 Automatic Transmission Transmission Removal (cont’d) 50. Remove the 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (A), subframe 52. Pry the left driveshaft out of the differential and the mounting bolts (4) (B), and the stiffeners (C), then right driveshaft from the intermediate shaft (see lower the front subframe (D).
Page 990 56. Remove the front mount bracket. 58. Pull the transmission away from the engine until it clears the dowel pins, then lower it on the transmission jack. NOTE: If the torque converter is stuck to the drive plate, pull it toward the transmission housing through the starter opening.
Page 991: Drive Plate Removal And Installation
Automatic Transmission Drive Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the engine crankshaft. 12 x 1.25 mm 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft) 2. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a crisscross pattern.
Page 992: Transmission Installation
Transmission Installation 1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-388). 6. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install the transmission housing mounting bolts. 2. Install the transmission lower mounts. 10 x 1.25 mm 38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft) 12 x 1.25 mm 64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft) 7.
Page 993 Automatic Transmission Transmission Installation (cont’d) 8. Install the engine stiffener mounting bolts (A). 12. Install new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft (B). 10 x 1.25 mm 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm 10 x 1.25 mm...
Page 994 14. Install a new set ring (A) on the right driveshaft (B). 17. Loosely install the subframe mounting bolts (4) (A) and the 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (6) (B) with the stiffeners (C), then tighten the bolts to the specified torque by aligning all reference marks (D).
Page 995 Automatic Transmission Transmission Installation (cont’d) 18. Install the transmission lower mount nuts. 20. Install the rear mount mounting bolts (A). 10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft) 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm 38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft)
Page 996 23. Install the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) and 28. Install the ball joints on each lower arms (A) with the power steering fluid line bracket bolts (B). the castle nuts (hex nuts) (B) and spring pins (C). 6 x 1.0 mm 12 x 1.25 mm 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 78 N·m (7.0 kgf·m,...
Page 997 Automatic Transmission Transmission Installation (cont’d) 32. Install the splash shield. 34. Install and tighten the nut (A) on the front mount (B), and install the ground cable (C) to the engine. 12 x 1.25 mm 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) 33.
Page 998 37. Install the harness cover (A) on bracket (B). 41. Connect the connectors to the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, then install the 6 x 1.0 mm harness clamps (C) on the brackets (D). 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 42.
Page 999 Automatic Transmission Transmission Installation (cont’d) 44. Install the starter (A) on the torque converter 45. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler housing. Connect the starter cables (B) to the lines (B) (see page 14-389). Clamp the ATF cooler starter, and install the harness clamp (C) on the hose with the clamp (C) on the starter by aligning clamp bracket (D).
Page 1000 51. Install the engine covers. 63. Loosen the front mount nut after the road test, then retighten the nut to the specified torque. 12 x 1.25 mm 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) 52. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page 14-368).
Page 1001: Atf Cooler Flushing
Automatic Transmission ATF Cooler Flushing Special Tools Required 7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the Commercially Available Transmission Cooler Flusher water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if Kent-Moore J38405-A or equivalent available.) This procedure should be performed before reinstalling the transmission.
Page 1002: Atf Cooler Hose Replacement
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement 17. Make sure the transmission is in the P position. 1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (B) and the Fill the transmission with ATF, and run the engine ATF cooler, and secure them with the clips (C). for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 (1.0 US qt) is discharged.
Page 1003: Shift Lever Removal
Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Removal SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A) SRS component locations, 2002 model (see page 23-19), and the park pin switch connector (B). 2003-2004 models (see page 23-20), and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service.
Page 1004: Shift Lever Installation
Shift Lever Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, 2002 model (see page 23-19), 2003-2004 models (see page 23-20), and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1.
Page 1005: Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly Apply silicone grease to these parts: • Sliding surfaces on the detent plate. • Sliding area on shift lever and control bracket. • Movable parts of the shift lock mechanism. • Select link and shift lever contacting area. •...
Page 1006: Shift Cable Replacement
Shift Cable Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the 7. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and SRS component locations, 2002 model (see page 23-19), grommet (B). 2003-2004 models (see page 23-20), and the 6 x 1.0 mm precautions and procedures (see page 23-21) in the SRS 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) before performing repairs or service.
Page 1007 Automatic Transmission Shift Cable Replacement (cont’d) 10. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket. the N position indicator comes on. 11.
Page 1008: Shift Cable Adjustment
Shift Cable Adjustment SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release it. SRS component locations, 2002 model (see page 23-19), Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the shift 2003-2004 models (see page 23-20), and the lever position is in N.

Honda 2004 Odyssey Service Manual

Quick Links

Chapters

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Honda 2004 Odyssey

Summary of Contents for Honda 2004 Odyssey